koine greek
DESCRIPTION
zxxzTRANSCRIPT
W\\ Cornell University^'' 7 Library
The original of tliis bool< is in
tine Cornell University Library.
There are no known copyright restrictions in
the United States on the use of the text.
http://www.archive.org/details/cu31 924021 6071 91
PA 8I3.N97"""""'"»">' "*""^
The elements of New Testament Greek ;a
3 1924 021 607 191
THE ELEMENTSOF
NEW TESTAMENT GREEK
BY THE SAME AUTHORA Short Syntax of New Testament Greek
Cambridge University Press, 2/6 net
THE ELEMENTS
OF
NEW TESTAMENT GREEK
A METHOD OF STUDYING THE GREEKNEW TESTAMENT WITH EXERCISES
by
Rev. H. P. V. NUNN, M.A.St John's College, Cambridge, sometime Lecturer at
St Aidan's College, Birkenhead
Cambridge
:
at the University Press
'
1914
CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS
IlDnlron: FETTEE LANE, E.G.
C. F. CLAY, Manager
(EDinliutflf): 100, PRINCES STREETBerlin: A. ASHER AND CO.
S-eipjia: F. A. BROCKHAUSiJefaaotfi: G. P. PUTNAM'S SONS
Botnfiaa an* aralratta: MACMILLAN AND CO.. Ltd.
STotonto: J. M. DENT AND SONS, Ltd.
JCofcao: THE MARUZEN-KABUSHIKI-KAISHA
PREFACE
THIS book is intended principally for those who wish to
take up the study of Greek after they have left school
with a view to reading the Greek New Testament. It is
concerned only with such words and forms as are found in
New Testament Greek. The words used in the exercises
are those which occur frequently in the Gospels and the Acts
of the Apostles : they are collected in vocabularies at the
end of the book, and it is believed that, if these vocabularies
are carefully committed to memory, the student will find
himself supplied with such words as are necessary to enable
him to read these portions of the New Testament with ease
and rapidity.
The author attaches great importance to the accurate
knowledge of the meanings of the most common words as an
aid to the thorough and rapid acquirement of a language.
Fortunately the words used in the Gospels and in the Acts
are comparatively few, and this fact together with the
simplicity of their style makes these books in many respects
very suitable first reading books even for those who do not
intend to limit their study of the Greek language to the
New Testament.
The most common irregular verbs are gradually introduced
into the exercises and are also collected in a table at the end
of the book. The sentences in the later exercises are taken
almost verbatim from the Greek Testament. The verbs in
/it are not introduced until the end of the book and the
VI PREFACE
author therefore recommends that the Greek Testament
itself should not be studied until these verbs have been
mastered and all the Greek into English exercises in the
book have been written out. Those who wish to become
proficient in the subject should also write out all the English^
into Greek exercises.
In no studj' is the saying of Bacon that writing maketh
an exact man so thoroughly exemplified as in the study of
languages.
The order in which the forms and constructions treated
in the exercises are placed is determined by the principle
that those are treated first which occur most frequently.
Syntax is only treated so far as to enable examples to be
given of the use of the Subjunctive and Infinitive moods and
of the Participle. The author ventures to refer those whodesire further information on this subject to his Short
Syntax of New Testament Greek published by the Cambridge
University Press, to which reference is occasionally made in
footnotes in this book.
The Introduction to that book on the subject of English
Grammar is reprinted here as an Appendix. Although it is
printed at the end of the book, the author would urge that
it should be studied at the beginning by those to whom its
contents are partially unfamiliar.
It is hoped that a student who has been carefully through
this book will be able to read the easier portions of the NewTestament with the aid of a dictionary. As however the
subject-matter of the New Testament is already so familiar
to most people in an English translation, such a power does
not really imply much knowledge of Greek. Those who*
wish to gain an intelligent knowledge of the language should
PEEFACE Vll
study some easy Greek author whose meaning is not already
familiar to them. Such may be found in any of the
many elementary editions of Xenophon or Lucian which are
published^ or even in Plato's Apology of Socrates studied
with or without the help of a translation. The latter book
is so interesting and important in its contents and so perfect
and yet so simple in its style that it should be studied in
the original language by all those who have 'the opportunity.
Translations of Lucian and of Plato's Apology are published
in a convenient form by the Oxford University Press.
If these books are thought to be too difficult the writings
of the Apostolic Fathers, especially the Epistle of St Clement
and the Shepherd of Hermas, may be recommended. These
latter books are however not published in a form adapted for
beginners, and the author has therefore attempted to meet
this need by publishing selections from them and from other
Christian authors of the first two centuries with notes at the
end of the " Syntax " referred to above.
In conclusion he wishes to record his obligation to
Messrs Bradley and Horswell for their "New Testament
Word Lists," which were of great service in preparing the
exercises in this book, and to his father for the care with
which he looked over the proofs.
H. P. V. NUNN.
175 Stockport Road,
Manchester.
November 6, 1913.
' See the "Elementary Classics" series published by Macmillan.
CONTENTSTjESSON •
• PAGE
I The Alphabet 1
II ' Breathihgs, accents, iota subscript ... 5
III The Present Indicative Active .... 7
IV The Present Indicative of contracted verbs in fm . 9
V Nouns of the Second Declension ending in os . . 10
VI The Genitive and Dative cases, the Definite Article 13
VII Neuter Nouns of the Second Declension ... 14
VIII Feminine Nouns of the First Declension . 16
IX Masculine Nouns of the First Declension, etc. 17
X Adjectives of the Second Declension, Present Tense
of "To be" 19
XI The Imperfect Indicative Active, Accentuation of
verbs . . 21
XII Imperfect of the verb "To be," Demonstrative Pro-
noims, airos 25
XIII The Present and Imperfect Indicative Passive . 27
XIV Deponent Verbs, the Present Imperative, the Relative
Pronoun . ... . . 31
XV The Present Infinitive, Personal and Possessive Pro-
nouns 35
XVI The Future Indicative Active and Middle, the
Middle Voice . ...... 40
XVII Twostemsof verbs, the Reflexive Pronoun, questions 43
XVIII The First Aorist Active 47
XIX The Second Aorist Active, Object clauses after verbs
of saying or thinking. . . . . 51
XX The Future and Aorist Active of liquid verbs,
Temporal clauses 55
X CONTENTS
LESSON PAOB
XXI The Third Declension 58
XXII Nouns with stems ending in a vowel, Neuter Nouns
of the Third Declension 62
XXIII Adjectives of the Third Declension, Irregular
Adjectives 65
XXrV The First and Second Aorist Passive, the Future
Passive 68
XXV Participles 72
XXVI The Genitive Absolute, Interrogative and Indefinite
Pronouns, certain Prepositions . . . . 77
XXVII The First and Second Aorist Middle, the comparison
of Adjectives, Adverbs 82
XXVIII Contracted Verbs ending in aa> and oa . . . 87
XXIX The Perfect and Pluperfect Tenses .... 91
XXX The Subjunctive Mood 95
XXXI Subjunctive of Contracted Verbs and of elfu, further
uses of the Subjunctive 99
XXXII Further uses of the Infinitive 102
XXXIII The Verbs in fu : diSa/u 106
XXXIV 7-Mij/tt 110
XXXV twniiu 112
XXXVI Other Verbs in ^i .116XXXVII The Optative Mood, Periphrastic Tenses . . . 119
Vocabularies 122
The Regular Verb 142
Table of Principal Parts of Verbs .... 149
Appendix I. Prepositions 164
„ II. Conditional Sentences . . . 161
„ III. Accentuation 164
„ IV. English Grammar .... 168
English-Greek Vocabulary... . igg^
Greek Index . . 200
LESSON I
THE ALPHABET
The Greek Alphabet consists of 24 letters, a good many of which
are identical with the corresponding letters of the Latin alphabet
which we still employ. Both alphabets were derived from the Phoe-
nician alphabet, from which the Hebrew alphabet also took its origin.
The letters given in the second column are now used only as capital
letters in printed Greek books ; but originally letters like these were
used in all Greek writing. They are generally called Uncial letters,
and all the earliest manuscripts of the New Testament are called
Uncial Manuscripts, because they are written throughout in these
letters.
About the 9th century a.d. another style of writing more resembling
the letters in the second column came into general use. These were
called Cursive or running letters, because they could be written without
raising the pen from the paper, like our modern handwriting.
This type of writing has remained in use ever since, both in
manuscripts and printed books, with certain modifications.
The student should learn the list of the names of the letters down
the column thoroughly in order that he may be able to find the words
in his Dictionary as quickly as possible.
He should make sure of the letters both by reading aloud and by
writing, as much time will afterwards be saved if he is able to read
accurately and quickly, and to grasp the sound of a word as soon as
he sees it written. It will be noticed that there are two letters to
represent the English letter " e," and two to represent the letter " o."
One of these represents the short sound of the letter, and the other
the long sound. The mark - written over a letter denotes that it is
to be pronounced long, and the mark - that it is to be pronounced
short. This distinction in the length of the sound denoted by the
letters must be carefully observed in pronunciation.
1
2
PRONUNCIATION 3
Notes on the Alphabet
(1) The examples given to show the pronunciation of a, f. rj, i, v
indicate the pronunciation generally given to these letters in English
schools. It is however certainly wrong, as is also the usual English
pronunciation of Latin.
A more correct prommciation would probably be as follows :
a to be pronounced as a in " father."
r] to be pronounced as «y in " they."
t to be pronounced as i in " machine " when long, and as i in " pit
"
when short.
V to be pronounced as French u in " du." We have no equivalent
sound in English : the y sound in such words as " sympathy " will do
fairly well. It should be noted that when a Greek word is transliterated
into English, v always becomes ^, for examples take the words " sym-
pathy," " hydropathic."
The form of the Greek capital letter Y is just like our letter Y, the
reason being that our letter Y is derived from the Greek through the
Latin.
The student will probably find it convenient and almost necessary
to adopt the usual English pronunciation as things are. The matter is
not one of vital importance.
(2) It will be noticed that two forms are given for the letter a-
:
the first is used when the letter occurs at the beginning or in the
middle of a word, the second when it occurs at the end.
The pronunciation of Diphthongs
Diphthongs are sounds produced by two vowels being sounded
together ; they are generally sounded as follows in England :
ai to be pronounced as ai in " aisle."
« to be pronounced as ei in " height.''
ot to be pronounced as oi in "oil."
av to be pronounced as aw in " caw."
ov to be pronounced as ow in " cow."
€v to be pronounced as " you."
VI to be pronounced as wi in " wipe."
It would be more correct to pronounce av like ow in " cow," and ov
like 00 in " loose."
1—2
4 CONSONANTS
Classification of Consonants, for reference only
Consonants are divided into three groups :
(1) Mdtes, or letters which cannot be sounded by themselvef
•^1 7j X, 'Tj A (t>>T, 8, 6.
(2) Semi-Vowels, or letters which have some sound of their own
X, fi, ./, p, a.
(3) Double Letters, or letters which are made up of two con
sonants. ^, f, i^.
The Mdtes are again subdivided according to the part of the voca
organs used in producing them :
(a) Gutturals, or letters produced in the throat (Latin "guttur"]
"^ 7. X-
(6) Labials, or letters produced by the lips (Latin "labia")
ff, ft 0.
(c) Dentals, or letters produced by the teeth (Latin "dens")
r, 8, 6.
The Semi-Vowels are divided into
:
(a) Liquids. X, /i, v, p.
(6) Spirant, a-.
Exercise 1
(1) Write out the English alphabet and give the Greek equivalen
for each letter as far as possible.
(2) Write out the Greek alphabet with the English equivalent fo
each letter.
These exercises should be repeated many times until perfect.
BREATHINGS AND ACCENTS
LESSON II
BREATHINGS, ACCENTS, IOTA SUBSCRIPT
It will be noticed that there is no sign for the letter A in the Greek
alphabet. The want of such a sign is made up by the marks called
breathings, one of which is written over every vowel or diphthong that
begins a word. The rough breathing ' (turned like the opening commain inverted commas) is sounded like our letter h, 6 is pronounced " ho,"
A is pronounced "ha." The smooth breathing ' indicates that the
vowel is to be sounded without the rough h sound. If the word begins
with a diphthong, the breathing is placed over the second vowel, and
not over the first
—
ovtos not ovtos. p at the beginning of a word
generally has a rough breathing.
pp in the middle of a word is sometimes written pp.
Accents are marks invented by Aristophanes of Byzantium about
200 B.O. in order to teach foreigners the correct pronunciation of Greek.
They were not written in the ancient manuscripts. They denoted
musical pitch and not stress, and no use of them is made now as a
guide to correct speech. The student who is pressed for time is
recommended not to trouble about the accents except in the case of
verbs.
They are chiefly of use to distinguish certain words which differ
only in accent. A list of these together with a brief account of the
principles of accentuation is given in the appendix.
The student however must on no account neglect the breathings,
but must write and pronounce them carefully.
A small I is often written under the letters a, ij, m especially when
one of these letters ends a word. It is called the Iota Subscript and
is a relic of an ancient diphthong. It is not pronounced, but it
must always be written. All the other letters in a Greek word are
pronounced.
yy is pronounced "ng," iyyi^a "engizo."
EXERCISES
Sxercise 2
Write out the following in Greek letters inserting breathings where
necessary. The English letter h at the beginning of a word denotes a
rough breathing. The vowels e and o are marked with a stroke ovei
the line when they are long ; when not marked they are short. Care
must be taken to use the proper Greek letter for them.
The letter i in brackets denotes that t subscript is to be written
under the preceding vowel. Use small letters throughout.
en arche(i) gn ho logos, kai ho logos en pros ton theon, kai theos
6n ho logos, houtos en en arche(i) pros ton theon. panta di autou
egeneto kai choris autou egeneto oude hen ho gegonen. en auto(i) zoe
en, kai hs zoB gn to phos ton anthropon. kai to phos en t6(i) skotia(i)
phainei, kai he skotia auto ou katelaben. egeneto anthrSpos apestal-
menos para theou, onoma auto(i) ioanes. houtos elthen eis marturian,
hina marturese(i) peri tou photos, hina pantes pisteusSsin di autou. ouk
en ekeinos to phos, all hina marturesS(i) peri tou photos, en to phSs to
alethinon ho photizei panta anthropon erchomenon eis ton kosmon.
en td(i) kosmo(i) en, kai ho kosmos di autou egeneto, kai ho kosmos
auton ouk egno. eis ta idia elthen, kai hoi idioi auton ou parelaboa.
hosoi de elabon auton edoken autois exousian tekna theou genesthai,
tois pisteuousin eis to onoma autou, hoi ouk ex haimaton oude ek
thelematos sarkos oude ek thelematos andros all ek theou egennethesanj
kai ho logos sarx egeneto kai eskenosen en hemin, kai etheasametha ten
doxan autou, doxan hos monogenous para patros pleres charitos kai
aletheias.
The student may correct his exercise by comparing it with the first
14 verses of the 1st chapter of St John in the Bible Society's (Nestle's):
Greek Testament. This exercise should be done several times until
perfect.
Write out the Greek of St John i. 19-28 in English characters.
Read as much as possible of the Greek Testament aloud, paying
great attention to the breathings and the length of the vowels.
Students who are working alone and who have no one to whom they
can read aloud are recommended to put portions of the Greek into
English letters, and to put them back into Greek letters after aninterval. It is most important to be able to read the characters
accurately and quickly before proceeding further.
1st singular
8 THE GREEK PRESENT
Greek the person and number of the subject of the verb are already
made sufficiently clear by the variable ending, and so there is no neea
to add a personal pronoun unless special emphasis is required.
It will be found that this principle applies to all forms of the:
verbs.
It will be noticed that two English equivalents are giveu for the
one Greek form of the Present tense. This is because there are more
tenses in English than in Greek, and one Greek tense has to do the
work of two EngUsh tenses.
The first form given in English above is called the Present
Indefinite, or Present Simple ; the second is called the Present
Continuous.
The Greek Present corresponds more closely in meaning to the
English Present Continuous than to the Present Simple.
In the forms of the Present Continuous tense will be noticed
another difierence between English and Greek, namely that in English
we freely employ Auxiliary or helping verbs to form our tenses (in this
case the present tense of the verb " to be " is used) while in Greek a
single word is used.
In spoken English we now never use the 2nd person singular in
addressing a single person, but always the 2nd person plural.
In Greek the 2nd person singular is always used in addressing a
single person, and the 2nd person plural is kept for addressing more
than one person. In these exercises when " thou " is written in English
the 2nd person singular must be used in Greek, and when "ye," or
"you" is written the 2nd person plural must be used in Greek, unless
an indication is given to the contrary.
In translating the Greek Testament it is better to use the 2nd person
singular of the English verb when the 2nd person singular is used in
Greek.
Exercise 3
Learn Vocabulary 1, p. 122. The words given in this and the
following vocabularies are all words which occur frequently in theNew Testament. The student should make a habit of carefully
mastering all the words in the vocabularies as he goes along, asthis will save much subsequent labour. The words given in brackets
CONTRACTED VERBS 9
after the English meanings of the words are words derived fromthe Greek words. They are intended to help the learner to rememberthem. The Greek words are also transliterated in the first few
vocabularies.
Give the English for : \4yei, \4yofifv, Xiyovtri, \4yfTe, Xiyiis. eipi-
(TKO^eVf ypd<j}€ij /SaXXert, d7ro6vr}(TK€i, /yXeTretff, €yeLpQV(n, Kpivere^ ^dWop.€v,
etTOLOJ, a7roo"TeX\ov(7(, aKOuoutrt, Xa/ijSai/erc, tra^ofiev, fiivei.
Give the Greek for : we say, they say, thou sayest, ye say, he says,
they are saying, she is saying, you say, they are dying, he dies, I amthrowing, she arises, we judge, thou art remaining, I am throwing, ye
judge, he sends, yoxi are writing, thou art eating, he finds, we are taking,
they look, she hears.
LESSON IV
THE PRESENT INDICATIVE OF CONTRACTEDVERBS IN fco
When certain vowels come together in the same word they unite
and form a diphthong, or a single long vowel.
This is called " contraction."
There are many verbs whose stems end in e, and, when the personal
endings are added to such stems, contraction takes place.
£ coming before another c becomes «.
( coming before o becomes ov.
€ coming before a long vowel, or a diphthong, drops out.
The present jtense of the verb (^iXc'a> "I love" is conjugated as
follows :
I love, or I am loving.
Thou lovest, or thou art loving.
He, she, or it loves, or is loving.
We love, or we are loving.
You love, or you are loving.
They love, or they are loving.
^iXS
10 SECOND DECLENSION NOUNS IN 05
Exercise 4
Learn Vocabulary 2.
XaXoviiCv, aiTfir, rripovai, iroifire, napaKoKel, fiaprvpova-i, (rfTfiTf, Ka\a,
6fa>povp,ev, Trjpeis.
They seek, he asks, thou callest, we bear witness, they speak, you
keep safe, I exhort, she makes, you behold, we love, they call, she asks,
we seek, they bear witness, he beholds.
LESSON V
NOUNS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION ENDING IN or
Nouns of the Second Declension ending in or in the Nominative:
case are dechned as follows. They are nearly all Masculine.
Singular
Plural
The declension of the noun given above brings before us again the
difference between English and Greek mentioned in Lesson III, namely
that it is often necessary to employ two or more words in English
where one sufl&ces in Greek. The various modifications of meaning!which are expressed in Greek by adding case endings to the noun are
expressed in English by placing a preposition before the noun, or byaltering the order of the words in the sentence. The only noun
1 The Iota Subscript ie always written under the m of the Dative Singularof the second declension : it is not sounded.
Name of Case
NOMINATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE 11
endings which remain in English are the 's and s' of the Possessiveease, and the s or other ending added to make the plural.
For example, if we want to show that a word is the subject of asentence, we nearly always put it before the verb, while the word whichis the object of the sentence is placed after the verb.
If we invert the order of the words, we invert the meaning of thesentence.
In the sentence "An angel finds a man," the word "angel" is thesubject of the sentence, and the word " man " the object.
On the other hand in the sentence "A man finds an angel" "man"is the subject of the sentence, and " angel " the object.
We have inverted the order of the words, and, in so doing, we havealso inverted the meaning of the sentence.
In Greek the first sentence should be written :
ayyeXos evpltTKei avOptoirov,
We show that ayyeKos is the subject by putting it in the Nominativecase, and that SvBptonov is the object by putting it in the Accusativecase.
In Greek the meaning of the sentence is still the same if we invert
the order of the words and write avdpiowov fvpLa-Kei ayyeXos, because in
Greek it is not the order of the words, but the case form, which decides
which word is the subject or object.
RULES
(1) The subject of a Finite' verb is in the Nominative case.
(2) The direct object of a Transitive verb is in the Accusativecase.
Before translating an English sentence into Greek it is necessary to
know which word is the subject of the verb, and which is its direct
object, if it has one.
The subject can always be found by putting "who?" or "what?"
before the verb.
In the first sentence given above :" An angel finds a man," we ask
" Who finds ?" The answer is " an angel." " An angel " is therefore
the subject of the sentence.
In the same way we can easily see that " a man " is the subject of
the second sentence.
1 A Finite verb is a verb in any mood but the Infinitive.
12 SUBJECT AND OBJECT
We can find the direct Object by placing " whom 1 " or " what ?
"
after the verb. In the case of the first sentence we say " an angel finds
whom?" Answer "a mau." Therefore "a man" is the object of the
sentence.
Many verbs such as the verb " I remain " cannot have a direct
object. Verbs which cannot have a direct object are called Intran-
sitive verbs, because the action which they denote does not pass over
to some other person or thing (Latin " transire ").
Verbs which can have a direct object are called Transitive verbs,
because the action which they denote passes over to another person or
thing.
It is easy to find which English verbs are Transitive and which are
Intransitive by making a sentence containing the verb and seeing if a
direct object can be put after it, or not.
(3) All verbs agree with their subject in number and person.
As all nouns are in the third person it is obvious that all verbs
which have a noun for a subject must be in the third person.
If the subject of the verb is a noun in the singular number, the
verb will be in the third person singular ; if the subject of the verb is
a noun in the plural number, or two or more nouns joined together by" and," the verb will be in the third person plural.
Examples :
avBpaiwoi, c(rBlov<nv Sprov. Men eat bread.
HvBpiairos Kal 8ov\os ea-Blovcriv Sprov. A man and a slave eat bread.
The English Indefinite Article " a " is not translated into Greek.
Exercise 5
Learn Vocabulary 3.
1. nvBpai'rros fX" ^ovKovs. 2. SyyeXos \a6v (rwfei. 3. Kvpios Xoyovs
ypdcjxi,. 4. iyeipeis dovXoi'. 5. a.v6pa>voi obov fvpio-KOvm. 6. SoCXos
^XfTTfi oiKOvs. 7. avBpanos (iTrooTeXXet a8iK(j}ovs. 8. Xa/i/Savcrf olkov.
9. SoCXoj e^ft Kvpiov. 10. evpiiTKop.ev 686v. 11. rrjpfiTe v6p.ovs.
12. avBpanos Koi bovKoi evpi(TKOviriv abe\<j}ovs.
1. A man hears an angel. 2. An angel rouses a man. 3. Slaves
find a way. 4. A brother has a house. 5. Lords send slaves.
6. They are writing words. 7. You find an angel. 8. A lord judgesmen. 9. We rouse slaves. 10. Thou keepest laws. 11. A man andan angel see the way. 12. Thou beholdest death.
GENITIVE AND DATIVE. THE ARTICLE 13
LESSON VI
USE OF THE GENITIVE AND DATIVE CASES.THE DEFINITE ARTICLE
The Genitive Case can generally be translated into English by the
use of the Preposition " Of," or by the Possessive Case, formed by
adding 's to the noun.
Example : o'koj avBpanov means, "a house of a man," or "a man's
house."
The commonest use of the Dative Case is to denote the person Toor For whom anything is done. It is used to express the indirect
object after verbs meaning "to give," etc.
Examples : He writes ]a,ws for a people.
ypa^ii v6}JlOVS Xa^.
He gives a house to a man.
In the last sentence oIkov is called the direct object, and av6pd>ira
the indirect object, because it is not directly affected by the action of
the verb.
The Definite Article
The Definite Article which corresponds to the English "the" is
declined in Greek like a noun. The forms that go with words like
Xdyor are as follows :
Singular. N. 6 Plural.
A. TOV
G. TOV
D. TM
It will be noticed that the endings except the Nominative Singular
are the same as the endings of Xdyor.
The definite article is always in the same case and number as the
noun to which it is joined.
Examples : Of the man, toO dvdpanov. To the men, tois dvBpairois.
"The man's house" is generally written in the following
order : 6 toO av6pa>7rov oikos.
N.
14 SECOND DECLENSION NEUTER NOUNS
Exercise 6
Revise Vocabularies 1, 2, 3.
1. 01 SoCXoi TTOiova-iv 686v t^ Kvpitf. 2. oi avdpanoi CrjTOXKTiv rois
dyyeXovs. 3. ypa(^« t&v tov Kvpiov^ vo/iov. 4. o tov SovXm d8e\(j)6s
^Xfirci TOV oiKov. 5. ypd4>oiiev rovs vo^oui r^ Xam. 6. 6^ 6e6s (jyiKel
roiis d8eX</)ovs. 7. fj;reiTe tov rSi/ avBpairav d8e\<f>6v. 8. Tqpovaiv
TOV TOV 6fov \6yov. 9. 01 SoOXoi eipia-KOva-iv ttjv 686v toIs Kvpiois.
10. Xap.pdvop.ev tov vopov Ta KOtrpa. 11. XaXS rois Xoyoui tw Xaa, icai
d Xaos Trtoreuet.
1. The angel finds the men. 2. They are writing the laws for the
people. 3. "We are seeking the brothers of the slave. 4. The lord's
slaves are making a way. 5. The slave remains. 6. You behold the
house of God 2. 7. "We keep the law of the Lord. 8. They write
words for the slaves. 9. We find a way for the people. 10. The man
saves the slave's brother. 11. The man and the slave are making
bread. 12. The brethren believe. 13. The angel writes laws for the
world.
LESSON VII
NEUTER NOUNS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION
In English all nouns denoting men or male animals are in the
Masculine gender ; all nouns denoting women or female animals are
in the Feminine gender ; all other nouns are Neuter.
But in Greek the rule is not so simple.
Nearly all nouns denoting men or male animals are Masculine, and
nearly all those denoting women or female animals are Feminine : but
other nouns may be either Masculine, Feminine, or Neuter. The
gender is generally decided by the ending.
1 When Kipios is written with a capital letter it meana " The Lord "; it
sometimea haa the definite article and sometimes not. It is the word used
in the Greek Version of the Old Teatament to denote the aaored nameJehovah.
' Beds generally haa the definite article in Greek, but not in Engliah.
GENDER AND TERMINATIONS 15
In the Second Declension nearly all nouns ending in os in the
Nominative singular are Masculine ; 6S6s " a way," epij^oy " a desert,"
irapBevos " a maiden," which are Feminine, are some of the few excep-
tions to this rule.
All nouns ending in ov in the Nominative singular are Neuter.
The declension of these neuter nouns is given below.
Note that the Nominative, Vocative and Accusative cases have the
same ending. This is the case with all neuter nouns.
Declension of epyov " a work."
Singular. N. epyov
16 FIRST DECLENSION FEMININE NOUNS
1. They take the garments of the men. 2. We send the brother's
children. 3. The angel receives the books for the people. 4. The
children have the garments. 5. He beholds the face of God. 6. Thou
hast the sheep. 7. You find the trees. 8. The Lord judges the works
of men. 9.' We seek the temple. 10. God works miracles (does signs)
for the people. 11. The man seeks the young child. 12. The children
eat the loaves. 13. Thou keepest the money safe.
LESSON VIII
FEMININE NOUNS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION
Nouns of the First Declension ending in a or r/ in the Nominative
singular are declined as follows. They are all feminine.
THE DEFINITE ARTICLE 17
18 NOUNS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION
71
ADJECTIVES OF THE SECOND DECLENSION 19
the lake with the Baptist. 9. You send the children out of the house.
10. For the church does not hear the commandments and the promises
of the prophet. 11. They call the disciples to the assembly. 12. For
God writes the commandments in the hearts of the disciples. 13. Theyoung men hear the parables of the kingdom.
LESSON X
ADJECTIVES OF THE SECOND DECLENSION.
THE PRESENT TENSE OF THE VERB "TO BE"
Adjectives of the Second Declension are declined as follows :
dyaSos "good."
Masc
Sing.
Plur.
Note that the Masculine endings are the same as those of 2nd
Declension uouns in os. The Feminine endings are the same as those
of 1st Declension nouns in q. The Neuter endings are the same as
those of 2nd Declension nouns in ov.
If a vowel or the letter p comes immediately before the endings of
an adjective, the endings in the Feminine are the same as those of
fjficpa.
Example: Syos "holy."
&yia ayiov
dyia aytov
dyiap ayiov
dyias dyiov
dylq dyia
2—2
20 AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. elfJii
RULE
Adjectives agree with the noun which they qualify in number,
gender, and case.
Note. An adjective preceded by an article is practically equivalent
to a noun. 6 irpSyros "the first" (man) ; to fo-p^ara "the last things";
a'l dyadai "the good" (women); ol ayiot "the holy'' (men) or "the
saints."
The Present Indicative of the verb " to be " is as follows :
Singular Plural
1st fljii I am ia-iiev we are
2nd (t thou art eVre you are
3rd foTiiy) he, she, or it is el(ri{v) they are
The verb " to be " belongs to a class of verbs called " Copulative
Verbs " because they serve to couple or link together two nouns or a
noun and an adjective. Such verbs cannot make a statement bythemselves, but must be followed by a noun or an adjective to makea complete predicate. This noun or adjective is called a predicative
noun or adjective, or the complement. These predicative noims or
adjectives are not put in the Accusative case like the object of a
transitive verb, because they are not objects. They must always be
in the same case as the subject of the verb, and, in the case of
predicative adjectives, they must agree with the subject in numberand gender as well as case.
This rule is sometimes stated in this form :
RULE
The verb " to be " takes the same case after it as before it.
Examples :
IMPERFECT INDICATIVE 21
You are just
BiKatoi 4tTTe
The tongue is evil
yXatro'd ea-Ti KUKr]
Note. The various parts of the verb " to be " given above should
not be placed as the first words in a sentence.
Exercise 10
Learn Vocabulary 7.
1. rj €KK\r]<rla ttutti] eartv* 2. ol avdpciTTot jrpo<l>TlTaL elatv. 3. rj
^aaiKeta etrri kukiJ. 4. rj evToXrj tov alcoviov deov SiKola iariv, 5. Xa/x-
jQavoufft TO tdta ip^axta. 6. erepot avOpaiTOi p,4vovcnv iv ra npara TrXola,
7. r€Kva ayairryrd etrfiev tov Qeov. 8. 6 npSyros ea'Ttv eaxoros, Kal 6
ea^aros Trp&Tos. 9. ol dyiol rrjpovaLV rd dyia o-d^^ara tov deov. 10. ^
yXatra-a vovr^pd iariv. 11. ai iriOTaX fievova-iv iv TO) Upa. 12. iiadrjTai
eare tov Kvplov. 13. ayLos ei, Kvpte. 14. Ka\ovp.€v Toiis erepovs veavias.
1. The brethren are disciples. 2. We are prophets. 3. Thou art
good, master. 4. The writings of the Apostles are holy. 5. Adifferent man is in the last boat. 6. We remain in the evil world.
7. He makes his own garments. 8. The man is just and good.
9. Therefore the Baptist exhorts the evil men. 10. The saints
remain before the house of God. 11. God keeps the souls of the
saints. 12. Ye exhort the disciples.
LESSON XI
THE IMPERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE.
ACCENTUATION OF VERBS
All past tenses of the Indicative mood are preceded by the letter t
which is called the Augment. If the verb begins with a consonant the
Augment is simply placed before the verb : Present, Xiya ; Imperfect
fXtyoi'. If the verb begins with a vowel the Augment combines
with it.
e before a becomes 77,
E before e becomes i; (except in the verb ex"")'
t, o, V are lengthened into 1, a>, v.
22 THE AUGMENT
A diphthong lengthens its first vowel
:
Examples :
m becomes r/, ei becomes t;,
01 becomes 9, and ev becomes tjv.
Present Imperfect
UKOVO)
€<l}l\0VV
24 EXERCISES
But, if the grave comes before the acute on the syllables which
contract'
', the acute remains alone. Examples : <j!)iXtofiej'= (^'Xoi3^ej(i^
^iXeVi= (^(X». But f<^tX«= £<^iXei, <^iX«r<B= (^iX€iV<».
Exercise 11
Learn Vocabulary 8.
1. ciireKTciveTe rois irpoiprjTas tov Kvpiov. 2. d tffor eireinre tovs
dyyeXovs €ts rov K6<r[iov, 3. ^ye^ tovs fMadrjras diro ttjs 6a\d(r(rrjs. 4. ot
Vfaviai eyfaipov. 5. ra npo^ara virrfyov^ ex T^s e'pf}p.ov. 6. d /Sairrtor^t
^ajrri'ffi Tas jrapdfvovs. 7. 6 ayye\os dwiXve tov anoaroXov. 8. oi
/ladijToi eSo^a^ov t6v Kvpiov. 9. oi ayaflol SofXoi e(J3fpov to. wpofiaTa.
10. 'Imai'ijf d iSoTTTiOT^S c/cpa^c iv Trj eptiprp. 11. eSiSaa-Kes ra iraiSia
<rvv Tots 8ov\ois. 12. €Kr)pva'aofiev to eiiayyeXtov T(p \aa. 13. tireiBov
oSv Toi/s dvOpanovs, 14. irepifiraTovfiev iv rio f^/J^. 15. e^e^aXKes
Ta BaifiQvia.
1. They proclaimed the Gospel to the disciples. 2. The maidens
departed from the house. 3. They dragged (dya>) the slave's boat to
the sea. 4. The prophets used to teach the children in the houses.
5. Ye glorified the Lord, angels. 6. Thou wast teaching the people.
7. They were driving the sheep together to the trees. 8. The child
was reading the scriptures in the temple. 9. We were departing from
the lake. 10. John the Baptist did not work signs. 11. The Lord
walked about in the wilderness. 12. Therefore you persuaded the
people. 13. The saints were rejoicing. 14. He was casting out devils.
15. We were carrying the boat. 16. You were loosing the slaves.
1 If the accent falls on the last syllable but one of any word in which thelast syllable but one is long, and the last syllable short, the acoeut is alwayscircumflex.
^ The accent never goes back beyond the augment.
IMPERFECT OF etflL DEMONSTRATIVES 25
LESSON XII
THE IMPERFECT OF THE VERB "TO BE."
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS, airos
The Imperfect tense of the verb " to be " is as follows :
Singular Plural
1. rjiirfv (Jiv, Tj) I was 1. rjfi.(v we were
2. rjs, ^o-da thou wast 2. rjTe you were
3. fjv he was 3. rjirav they were
The Demonstrative Pronouns oiros " this " and infivos " that " are
declined as follows :
''" ovTo?, €Kecvo<;, avrov
oUtos and exfij/or agree with the nouns which they qualify in
number, gender, and case just like adjectives. When they qualify a
noun the noun always has the article.
Examples
:
This man, oStos 6 avdpairos, or 6 avdpmiros oStos,
Those sheep, iKeiva to. irpo^ara, or ra npo^ara eKfiva.
That commandment, exeivrj fj ivroki), or i) ivroXri eieeivri.
When ovTos stands by itself without any word expressed for it to
agree with it means "this man," aun? means "this woman," rovro
means "this thing,'' ra€ra means "these things."
The same is the case with eKcivos.
avTos, avTT), airo is declined like inctvos. In the New Testament it
is the ordinary word for " he, she, it " etc.
Examples :
For he saves the people.
avTos yap ormffj tov \a6v.
They were leading him to the sea.
Tjyov avTov els Trjv dakaairav.
He was sending her from the temple.
67rf/t7rei/ avrfjv otto tov iepov.
This is his slave.
OVTOS €(TTt.v 6 bovKos aVTOV^.
Those are her houses.
QVTOL eltriv ol olkol ai/rrjs^.
avTos also means "himself, herself, itself" when connected with a
noun.
Example :- Jesus himself taught them.
Irjo-ovs aiiTos edldaaicev avrovs.
(In Classical Grnek the nominative case of airos has this latter
meaning only, and cannot be used in the sense of "he, she, it.")
1 If a noun is followed by a genitive of aMs in the sense of " his, her,"or "its," it always has an article.
EXERCISES. THE PASSIVE 27
Sxercise 12
Revise Vocabularies 1—8.
1. ovTot ol av6poj7roi airiByrifTKOv ev ttj eprj^a. 2. edeapovfiev tovs
oiKovs avTwv. 3. ovTOs ovv ^v fiadrjT^s *lcodvov rod ^aTrrtaTov, 4. rjijLev
yap doSXoi TTJS ifiaprias. 5. ineiva Si to SivSpa e^aWov fls tijk doKaaaav,
6. avTOt epevov ev tm irXolaj, 7. 6 yap 3ebs trwfet avrovs diro tov
TTOvrjpov (the evil one). 8. ^re oZv Sea-n-orai tov Xaov. 9. ov yap
Kpivofiev ravTa. 10. ot viol avrov ^aav KaKoL 11. avrrj yap rjv tj
€VTo\rf avTov^ 12. eKr]pva-(ropev ravra ev rrj eKKXTjtTLa. 13. fKetvot Se
e^ejSaXXov ra Satfiovta. 14. eV CKfivrj Tjj rjjiepq eSd^afov Tyjv o'ocfyiav tov
Kvpiov. 15. ai irapBivoi &vvTJyov ra vpo^ara avrSiv els ra bivSpa.
16. ev eKeivji rfj &pq exalpop,ev. 17. d 'lijo-oOs avTos ovk efidirniev dXKd
01 jiadrjTal airov. 18. ij fa)?; jucvei ev avTois.
1. In the beginning was the word. 2. This is the love of God.
3. For the Lord saves the souls of men from the evil one. 4. Peace
and truth are in the kingdom of God. 5. They were glorifying his
power and wisdom. 6. For in that day we were preaching the gospel
of the kingdom in the synagogue, and casting out devils. 7. You saw
her sons in the house. 8. We received them into the boat. 9. Yewere in the temple in those days. 10. This is life eternal. 11. Weheard the voice of the angel from the trees. 12. They were holy and
beloved. 13. Their children were in the assembly. 14. Thou wast
reading the scripture to them in the synagogue. 15. The Jews used
to slay his prophets. 16. The Baptist himself used to baptise his
disciples.
LESSON XIII
THE PASSIVE VOICE OF THE PKESENT AND IMPEEFECTINDICATIVE
A verb is said to be in the Active Voice when its subject is spoken
of as p,cting ; it is said to be in the Passive Voice when its subject is
spoken of as suffering, or being acted upon.
Examples : Active " I love," " I was striking."
Passive "I am loved," "I was being struck."
28 THE INDICATIVE PASSIVE
N.B. Only Transitive verbs can have a Passive voice. There are
certain verbs such as " I fall," " I slip," etc. which do not speak of the
subject as acting, but which are regarded as Active verbs because they
are Intransitive.
The Passive voice is formed in Greek, as in Latin, by the use of
special endings, and not by the use of the Auxiliary verb " to be " as in
English.
The Passive voice of the Present and Imperfect Indicative of \va is
given below. Note that the Imperfect Passive has the Augment.
Present Indicative Passive
Sing. I. Xvofuu I am loosed, or I am being loosed.
2. Xiei, or Xir/ Thou art loosed, or thou art being loosed.
3. XicTM He is loosed, or he is being loosed.
1. \v6iie6a We are loosed, or we are being loosed.
2. \iea-6e You are loosed, or you are being loosed.
3. \vovTai They are loosed, or they are being loosed.
Plur.
Imperfect Indicative Passive
Sing. 1. eXvofiriv I was being loosed.
2. eXvov Thou wast being loosed.
3. fXiero He was being loosed.
Plur. 1. iXvo/ieSa We were being loosed.
2. eXvea-Be Tou were being loosed.
3. eXvovTo They were being loosed.
'I wasNote. As in the case of the active voice a simple Past tense '
loosed " etc. will often sufficiently translate the Imperfect.
The Present and Imperfect Indicative Passive of verbs in ea are
conjugated as follows
:
Present Indicative Passive
(j>i.\oviiai
AGENT AND INSTRUMENT 29
Imperfect Indicative Passive
e<j)L\ov[jirjv
30 AGENT AND INSTRUMENT. PREPOSITIONS
RULE
In Greek the Agent of the action of a Passive verb is
expressed by vv6 with the Genitive : the Instrument is expressed
by the Dative alone'.
Active verbs may also be followed by a word denoting the instru-
ment.
Example : He kills the apostle with a sword.
dnoKTeivfi tov aTTOiTToXov fia)(^aipa.
The same verb may have both an Agent and an Instrument.
Example : The apostle is loosed by the angel by a word.
6 diToa-ToXos \verat inro tov ayyeXov Xoytp.
The Prepositions 8td and /xci-a may be followed by a noun or
pronoun either in the Accusative or Genitive case.
The student should here refer to the Appendix on prepositions
on p. 154. The preposition vpos is generally followed by an Accu-
sative case, and the preposition vtto by a Genitive case. For the
meanings of these prepositions see the vocabulary.
Exercise 13
Learn Vocabulary 9.
1. cVe/iTTCo'^e viro rav bL^aaKoKav Trpbs erepov oxXov, 2. iv TovTa
Ta TOTTft) iBeapovfiev Tols oCJidaXpois tov Kvpwv Tatv ovpavatv. 3. o^Toi ol
\6yoi iXoKovvTO vno TOiV aTrocrrdXajv irpos Toiis irpetr^vTepovs. 4. eitdiis
8e Ta Trpo^ara (rvvrjy€TO Xidots vtto Tatv Xr](rT5tv. 5. dne(rTeW6p.^da jMSTa
t5>v 7rpo<j)TjTav dia tov o^ov. 6. dta tovto iireidov Tols Tatv Kpiratv
Xoyoif. 7. /xera Tavra ol Tfkatvai eSiddaKOVTo p€Ta twv veavtStv virb Tav
irpea^vrlpayv. 8. ol vio\ tov oiKoBetTTTOTOv ^trOiov tovs dpTovs. 9. St
viroKpird, ov irfpiirdTUS iv tols oSoIr tov Kvpiov. 10. 6 6p6vos eVoieiTO.
V7rh Tatv epyaTotv Trj otKta tov Kvpiov ev lepovaaXrjp.. 11. ol epyaTiu
direaTeWov tovs KapTToiis Trjs yrjs irpos tovs olKodeffwoTas. 12. St *Upov-
(ToKfin, ov)( fvpta-Kfi TrKTTTj. 13. irapcKoXoviifSa Tois \6yois Tatv padjjTav
iv (Keivco ™ xpova). 14. rjyop,iv tcl tikvo 8ia tov Upov. 15. per' cKeivai
Tas rjpepas ol XyaTOi virriyov Trpbs ti}v eprjpov.
1. The word of God was being preached by the apostles. 2. These
fruits were sent by the householder to the elders. 3. On this account
the judges were being persuaded by the faithful teachers. 4. Thou
wast leading the people through the wilderness to Jerusalem. 5. After
' This rule is not always strictly observed in the N.T.
DEPONENTS. THE IMPERATIVE 31
this they were being sought for by the crowd. 6. They were wicked
in the eyes of the Lord. 7. The throne was being carried by the
workmen to another place through the house. 8. Immediately the
elders went with the prophets through Jerusalem. 9. The world
was made through the Son of God. 10. O thou hypocrite, thou dost
not keep the commandments of the Lord. 11. The young men were
being taught by their own teachers. 12. Thou art not sent by the
sons of the prophets. 13. Therefore immediately after these things
we preached the word of God to the disciples. 14. Ye were being
roused by the words of the householder.
LESSON XIV
DEPONENT VERBS. THE PRESENT IMPERATIVE.THE RELATIVE PRONOUN
Deponent verbs are verbs which have the form of the Passive voice
in Greek, but which are translated by a verb in the Active voice in
English. They are called "Deponent" because the old grammarians
considered that they had "laid aside" (Latin "deponere") a Passive
sense, and assumed an Active.
Examples :
32 THE PKESENT IMPERATIVE
Present Imperative Active Present Imperative Passive
Plur. 2. XvfTf loose (ye). 2. XvctrOe be loosed (ye).
3. Xviraia-av let them loose. 3. \vfa-6aa-av let them be loosed,
or Xv6vT(ov or \vfa8a>v
The Present Imperative of verbs in fa is as follows :
Present Imperative Active
<j)l\€l
THE RELATIVE PRONOUN 33
Let him continue to keep the commandments.
TripeiTO) Tas ivToKds.
Do not walk ifi the ways of wickedness any longer.
jXTj TTopevov ev rais 68ols rrjs aStnias.
The Relative Pronoun
The Relative Pronoun is declined as follows :
34 RELATIVE PRONOUNS
Examples
:
1. I see the men who are coming,
jSXcTTQ) Tovs dvdpanovs oi epxovrat.
2. The men that you are sending are going away.
oi avBpairot ots (TTeWere direp^^ovrat.
3. This is the writing that is kept in the synagogue.
avTT] effTiv fj ypa<j)T] ^ TTjpeiTai ev Ttj avfayaytj.
4. This is the writing which the apostle used to have.
avTTj itrrXv rj ypa<l>rj 7jv ft-x^v 6 aTrotrroXos.
5. The children whom I was teaching are going away.
Ta TraiSla a edlddaKov 'aTrtpx^Tai.
6. The prophet whose books thou art reading is holy,
o rrpo<j)TiTris oi dvayivaxTKeis ra /3(/3Xia dyios etrriv.
7. The men for whom I am doing this are slaves.
oi avdpojirot ots noia) ravra 8ov\ot eltrtv*
In example 1 dv6pi)novs is in the Accusative case because it is the
object of the clause in which it stands, oj is in the Nominative case
because it is the subject of the clause in which it stands.
The student should carefully consider the reason for the cases of the
Relative Pronouns in the other examples in the same way.
Sections 8 and 10 in the Appendix on English grammar should
be read in connexion with this lesson.
The Relative clauses in the examples given above are all Adjectival
clauses, because they qualify and explain their antecedents just like
adjectives,
Exercise 14
Learn Vocabulary 10.
1. iiropevopeSa npos ttjv 6a\aor(Tav p,fTa T&v liadrjrav, 2. rjpvoiivto
TOP Kvpiov TTJs 86^s bs rijpei avTois dvo tov novrjpov. 3. eScxea-Bt'
TOVS dypois ots eix^v 6 Xabs 'la-parjX. 4. jifi diroKpivov tm Seo-wdrj.
5. drrfipxovTO irpbs tt)v eprjpov ev ^ 6 'ladvrjs e/3d7rTife. 6. dwfKpi-
vd/mjv 7-oiy dyyeXois oJ rjpxovTO dno t&v irpeo-^vTepav. 7. pj) epyd^ttrSe
Tfjv dbiKtav. 8. ovToi Sf^*''"'" '"'"^r ApapraiXovs oi epxovTai npos avTon
Koi io-6lti ptT abrSjv. 9. airrov T&V Kf<j}aXSiv T&v waiSiav & ntpno,
10. ol SoiXoi ots eSfX^TO epya^ovTai ev toIs dypois. 11. dirotrreXXoVTM.
PRESENT INFINITIVES 35
TO ifidrta a Xaji^avovaiv fls tov oIkov. 12, be^^cda to ^i^Kiov o ypa(j)ci
6 airoaToXos. 13. 8irjp^6i£e6a ovv Toiis dypavs airaiv fierd tcov reXaivav,
14. KHKOl KOI KOVTjpoX bovkoi ^Te. 15. &VTi<r6<oiTav tS>v Xtdav TOV
iepov o aKoSopeiTO t£ Kvpia.
1. Let the love of the brethren remain in their hearts. 2. Keepthe holy commandments which you receive from the teachers. 3. Donot deny the Lord of glory who saved yovi from the evil world. 4. Let
the elders whom they send receive the law for the people. 5. We were
going through the fields in which the slaves were working. 6. After
these things they built a temple to the God of Israel. 7. Do not
walk (pi.) in the way of sinners. 8. Let him receive the messengers
who proclaim the kingdom of heaven. 9. The disciples whom Johnwas baptising remained in the wilderness. 10. Let them work the
works of him that sent them. 11. For the prophet receives the sinners
who are sent to him and eats with them. 12. Do not answer the
teacher. 13. After those days they went away into the place in which
the young men were remaining with the sheep. 14. This is the elder
whose children were reading the books of the law which the prophet
wrote.
LESSON XV
THE PRESENT INFINITIVE.
PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS
The Present Infinitives are as follows
:
Present Infinitive Active Present Infinitive Passive
\veiv to loose \iea-dai to be loosed
<j>iKiiv to love (/)i\«o-flat to be loved
fivai to be
The so-called Infinitive Mood is really, both in Greek and English,
the Dative case of a verbal noun. In many of its uses however its
Dative sense is quite forgotten, and it is treated exactly as if it were
in indeclinable verbal noun. It is always neuter. The Infinitive
Dartakes of the nature both of a verb and a noun. As a verb it has a
lubjeot expressed or understood, and it may have an object ; it is
qualified by adverbs, and has tense and voice. As a, noun it may
itand as the subject or object of another verb.
3—2
36 THE INFINITIVE
Infinitive used as a Subject. The Infinitive is especially common
as the subject of an Impersonal verb or of ecrri. As it is a verbal
noun and therefore partakes of the nature of a verb, it may have a
subject of its own. If this subject is expressed it is put in the
AocuSAirvB case.
Examples
:
To err is human.
n-apa/SaiVew dv6pajrtv6v iari.
It is lawful to heal on the Sabbath,
effort dtpanevciv iv ra (ra^^arif.
It was necessary for him to pass through Samaria.
€&ei avTov SiipxeirBai Bia rrjs Safuipias.
It is good for us to be here.
Ka\6v i<TTiv fifias etvai fSde.
Notice that in the English of the last three examples the word " it"
is placed first as a sort of preparatory subject, the real subjects of the
three sentences are however the Infinitives " to heal," " to pass," " to
be here,'' as will be seen if the sentences are written in the following
form;
To heal on the Sabbath is lawful.
To pass through Samaria was necessary for him.
To be here is good for us.
In the last two examples the subjects of the Infinitives airov and
^/iSs are expressed in Greek in the Accusative case.
Note that in English these words are in the Dative.
The verb e^eari is however followed by a noun or pronoun in the
Dative case to express the person to whom the action is lawful.
Example
:
It is lawful for us to heal on the Sabbath.
e^eaTiv fffiiv depairevetv iv tc5 (ra^^arai.
Infinitive used as Object. Any verb whose action naturally
implies another action or state as its object may take an Infinitive'
as its object. Such verbs are generally the same in Greek as in
English. They are sometimes called "Modal Verbs."
Examples: They wish to remain.
^oiXovrai Kara/iiveiv.
We are willing to hear.
6i\optv aKOvciv,
IN FINAL CLAUSES 37
I am able to do this.
bwajxai TOVTO TToieiv,
They began to build.
rjpXOVTO olicohojieiv.
After verbs meaning "to entreat," "to exhort," "to command,"a' verb in the Infinitive mood is used as the direct object, while anoun or pronoun in an Accusative, Genitive, or Dative case is usedwith it as the indirect object of the main verb. If the subject of theInfinitive is expressed it is in the Accusative case.
Examples
:
He commanded them to bring Paul.
EKcXcuev avTovs ayeiv rbv IlavKov.
I beseech thee to heal my son.
deofiai trov Sepaireveiv rov vlov fiov*
He charged them not to depart from Jerusalem.
TaprjyyeWev avTois fifj virdyuv otto 'lepoffoXu/Kav.
Example of an Infinitive with its subject expressed
:
He commands Paul to be brought.
KcXeuei Tov HavKov SyetrOai,
All clauses which stand as the subject or object of a verb are called
Substantival Clauses.
The Infinitive used in Final clauses. As has been already stated
the Infinitive is really the Dative case of a verbal noun.
It may therefore be used not only as the verb in a Substantival
Clause but also as the verb in an Adverbial Clause expressing Purpose.
Such clauses are called Final Clauses.
The Infinitive is used in Final clauses on the same principle that
a noun in the Dative case is used in English to express purpose.
Example : He went to the market for corn.
And so both in Greek and English the Infinitive is used to express
Purpose.
Examples
:
He sent his slaves to call the prophets.
dTreoreXXe roiis SoiXovs KoKeiv tovs 7rpo0i)Tas.
John used to go to the Jordan to baptise the disciples.
d 'la>di'>;r ^pxero n-pbs tok ^lophamjv fiairn^eiv tovs fiaBrfras.
38 PERSONAL AND
The negative used with the Infinitive in the New Testament is
almost always /irj.
Summary. The Infinitive is used in Substantival Clauses as
being a Verbal Noun.
The Infinitive is used in Final Clauses as being the Dative Case
of a verbal noun.
Personal and Possessive Pronouns
The Personal Pronouns of the 1st and 2nd persons are as follows
:
Singular
. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS 39
01 fiiv followed by oi fit must be translated "Some...others."
Examplej Some remained, but others were going away.
01 fitv efievov, oi bk aiTr)p^ovTO.
As the personal ending of the verb is generally sufficient to show
what person and number the subject is, the Nominative'case of the
Personal Pronouns is not used except for emphasis.
Example: Thou art a slave, but I am free.
(TV fiev €1 8ov\os, eyw he eXevdepos.
The Possessive Pronouns are
:
e>os
(TOS
40 THE FUTURE INDICATIVE
r^ 'laavfi. 15. cKcXevojUcv roiis dyyeXour neiiirtirdat. 16. o oe ouk
^dfXev wopeieirdai ev rais oSois Tov Kvpiov. 17. tyw <rc kcXcvco CKei
liivciv, ail 8e oIk vnaKoveis. 18. oi /lev ^trav SoCXoi ol 8e e\fv6epou
19. naptKoKovfiev tov "Kaov vwaKOVciv Tois Trpo4>j]Tais.
1. We must not deny the Lord of glory (use 8el). 2. They were
not willing to obey the elders'. 3. It is lawful for them to receive the
money from the publicans. 4. I am a man, but you are children.
5. "We wish to see the temple of the God of Israel. 6. We are sending
the slaves to call the blind and the poor to the marriage. 7. It is bad
for them to be there. 8. It was necessary for Jesus to pass through
Samaria to proclaim the Gospel to the people. 9. We commanded the
prophet to be brought. 10. I besought him to heal my child, but he
would not. 11. Jesus commanded them to send the blind man.
12. I am not able to exhort them to remain in Jerusalem. 13. There-
fore they began to confess their sins to us. 14. Some went to their
houses and others to the temple. 15. We are free, but you are slaves.
16. Jesus is led into the wilderness to be tempted by the devil.
17. We came to John to be baptized by him in the Jordan. 18. They
are not able to do this. 19. I sent the messenger to you, but he was
not willing to depart. 20. We must work the works of him that sent
us (use 8fi). 21. They wish to read the books which thou hast.
LESSON XVI
THE FUTURE INDICATIVE ACTIVE AND MIDDLE.THE MIDDLE VOICE
The Future Indicative Active is generally formed in Greek by
putting (T at the end of the stem of the verb, and then adding the
endings of the Present Indicative Active.
The Future Middle is generally formed by putting o- at the end of
the stem of the verb and then adding the endings of the Present
Indicative Passive.
The meaning of the Middle voice will be explained below.
' Dat. case.
ACTIVE AND MIDDLE 41
The Future Active and the Middle of Xiito " I loose " are as follows :
Active Middle
Xuo-ffl I shall loose, etc. Xia-oum I shall loose (for myXva-fis \i(rei, Xva-rj own benefit), etc.
\va-et
XvirofjLev
Xucrere
\V(T0V(TI,
Xvo
\v(r6fie0a
Xvaecrde
XlKFOVTai
Future Infinitive Active
Xva-eiv To be about to loose
Future Infinitive Middle
Xvaea-Sai To be about to loose (for
one's own benefit)
Note that each of these forms is made up of the stem of the verb,
the <r, and the appropriate ending of the Present tense.
If the stem of the verb ends in a consonant, this consonant
combines with the a- which is added to it to form the endings of the
Futxire in the manner shown below.
If the stem of the verb ends in a guttural letter it, y, Xt it joins
with the (T and makes ^.
Examples
:
Present Future Act.
OKOKta
dvoiyai
apxa Act.
Mid.
I pursue
I open
I rule
I begin
I have
dvoi§a>
ap^a
Future Mid.
dvQi^ofiai
ap^ofiai
exa 1 nave «|q> (but observe the rough
breathing)
If the stem of the verb ends in a labial letter ir, /3, <(>, it joins with
the a- and makes yjf.
Examples
:
»Present Future Act. Future Mid.
jSXettoj I see /SXc'i^m ^Xei/^o/iai
ypa<t>(0 I write •ypo\//'0) ypayjfO/iai
ncfJLtro) I send jrefn^m ire/ii/ro/iai
If the stem of the verb ends in a dental letter r, 8, 6, it is dropped
before the <r of the Future.
Examples
:
Present Future Act. Future Mid.
neiOo) I persuade wiiirat TTcliTopm
42 THE MIDDLE VOICE
Verbs in ea lengthen the e to ?; before adding the endings of the
Future Tense.
Examples :
Present Future Act. Future Mid.
aireo) I ask aiT^cra) airrjiTOfiai,
fijreo) I seek C^Tr)<ra CriTTja-oiiai
The Future tense of flfii is as follows :
torofiai I shall be, etc.
etret, ecnj
ttrrai
eaovTOi
The Middle voice. The Middle voice generally denotes that the
subject is acting upon himself, or in some way that concerns himself,
but often it is not distinguished from the Active voice in meaning.
Many verbs have no Future Active forms, but only Future Middle.
These Futures Middle are " deponent " and have exactly the same
meaning as if they were active.
The Middle voice of the Present tense is the same in form as the
Passive voice.
Exercise 16
Learn Vocabulary 12.
1. ovK a5iK^O"ou(rt rot reKva, 2. oi be evdva-ovari ra IfiaTia. 3. dvoi^eL
rovs 6(l>Ba\fiovs rav TV<l>Katv ot (Tvudyovrai iv TJj a-vvaywy^, 4. neiaofitv
Toi/s epydras epyd^caSat iv Tols dypois- 5. nefi^j^o) irpos avTovs trot^vs
Km wpotpTjras, dW* ovk aKovtrovtriv avToi/s ol viol l(rparj\. 6. cKelvos
earai ayms ra Kvpia. 7. Sphere rav '\ovhaiaiv o\ KOTOiKOvai eKfiViji' Tr\v
yr^v. 8. 7rpo<pTjTeva'€is tu Xac5 TovT<fi Kai viraKovtrovtri (rot. 9. 8taicovr]a'€Tf
Tols i)(Bpois vp,S>v OTi OVK TjSeXfTf vnaKOveiv fioi, dXX' eya eXeij(ro> i/iSs en
CKeivrj Tij Tjpipa. 10. KaToiKTitTopev Toiis dypoiis tS>v e'xBpSiv ols fiiijKoi/oi/jfK
OTi OVK rjKovofiev tov \6yov tov Kvplov. 11. ol BiaKOVOi ttjs OTJi/aycoy^s ov
8ta}^ov(rt Tovs X^oras ev ra a-a^^dra. 12. cuXo-yeircocrai' ttjv 86^av tov
deov ItrparjX, 13. trep'^opev Toi/s veavlas KaroiKelv t^v y^v. 14. ot
TTpea-^vrepoL e^oviTLTa npS^ara A tra^erai aTTorau €)(dpa)V. 15. dp^ofifSa
€v\oye2v rovs viovs t&v wpotjjrjr&v.
THE TWO STEMS OF VERBS 43
1. I will open the books which are in the synagogue. 2. Theyshall be just and faithful in that day, and I will bless them because
they hear my voice. 3. "We shall behold the face of the Lord in the
temple which is built in Jerusalem. 4. The Lord will have mercyupon them because they dwell in the land of their enemies, and hewill lead them into their own land. 5. Jesus therefore began to send
the apostles to proclaim the Gospel to the house of Israel. 6. We will
send the slaves to pursue the robbers. 7. Peace and truth shall dwell
in our land because we obey the commandments of the Lord. 8. Hewill speak these things to the multitudes in parables. 9. I shall be
first, but thou wilt be last. 10. Do not praise the wicked, for the
wicked shall not dwell in our land.
LESSON XVII
THE TWO STEMS OF VERBS.THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUN. QUESTIONS
Greek verbs are not divided into conjugations with different endings
like Latin verbs.
All the verbs in to have the .same endings : the differences between
them are caused by variations in the stem.
The verbs which are given as examples in the last exercise (except
Treidio) and also those in the vocabulary have but one stem : but manyverbs have at least two stems :
—
(1) The Verbal stem from which all the tenses with the exception
of the Present and Imperfect are generally formed.
(2) The Present stem from which the Present and Imperfect
tenses are formed.
The fact that the meanings of verbs are given in dictionaries under
the form of the Present Indicative tends to fix attention upon it, and
to produce the impression that it is the original and most important
form of the verb. This is however not the case. The present stem is
really derived from the verbal stem, and is generally a lengthened
form of the verbal stem.
The verbal stem is the most important part of the verb ; nouns
44 THE VERBAL STEM
and adjectives of kindred meaning are formed from it, and not from
the present stem.
Examples
:
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. ai/Vo? 45
Pao-Tofw I carry n-etpafm I try or tempt
Sofafo) I glorify a-KavSdKi^ai I cause to stumble
eyyi^a I draw near am^a) I save
ipyd^ojxai I work
Observe that in all the verbs given above the Future is formed
from the verbal stem in accordance with the rules given on p. 41.
Reflexive Pronouns are used when the subject and object of a
sentence or clause refer to the same person or thing.
The forms which occur in the New Testament are
:
e/iavTou myself
a-eavTov thyself
iavTou {airov) himself
iavrrjv (^avTrjv) herself
eavTo (avTo) itself
iavTovs ourselves, yourselves, themselves
As we have already seen, airos, -ij, -o, means "he, she, it" when it
stands alone, and " self" when it is joined to a noun or pronoun.
When avTos is joined to, and immediately follows, an article it
means "the same." The article and aurds are always in the same
number, gender and case.
Distinguish carefully between
The same man.
6 avTOS av6ptin:os.
and The man himself.
6 avOptairos avTos.
Distinguish also between this last use of airos and the use of the
Reflexive pronoun :
The man himself says this.
6 ("ivdpaTros airos \iyei, tovto.
The man casts himself into the sea.
d avBpaTros /SaXXei avrbv els Tr)V BaKcurcrav.
TO. avrd contracted to Toira means " the same things.''
Questions
Questions are expressed in Greek not by altering the order of the
words in the sentence, but by placing the question mark ; at the end
of the sentence. It will be noticed that this question mark is like an
iQ QUESTIONS IN GREEK
English semi-colon. The Greek colon is a single dot above the
line • .
Examples
:
They are doing this.
VOlOVai TOVTO.
Are they doing this?
TTOIOVITL rOlTO ,*
Exercise 17
Learn Vocabulary 13.
1. Kpvy\ro}ifv TO iraiblov ev tji oIkli}; 2. ovx^ ayiatrowi ra (ra^^ard
fiov. 3. oi avTol HyyekoL eTotfiairovtnv eavToiis TTopeveaBai. 4. Kadapi^eTt
€avrovS) viroKpiTai. 5. aTroicaXvylrfis ai/rois ttjv do^av rtjs (ro^tas. 6. e^erf
^co^v ev eavTois. 7. cru yap rrpd^ets Tci aira, 8. ^Irjtrovs avTos ^yytfc
Tois avTOLS p.aSi]TaLS. 9. rd^ovo'i tovs avroiis avSpanrovs ev tols dypois.
10. aKavdoKltreTe Toiis dyiovs; 11. ayjreTai tov Ip-aTiov tov 7rpo<j>rjTov,
12. TTopevao^ai irpos rrjv avrrjv oiKiav ; 13. dycd^fTe Tag KOpSlas vp.Sav
TTJ dydirij rrjs a\ij6elas- 14. dTrd^ovo't. roi/s Xerrpoi/s diro tov Upoii.
15. eKKoyj/eTe Ta 5iv8pa d iarTi iv eKcivrj Tjj yfj. 16. 6av}id<rei ttjv &6^av
TOV Kvpiov.
1. Ye shall set the books in order in the synagogue. 2. They will
hope to behold the signs of the apostles. 3. We will draw near to hear
the voice of the teacher. 4. The wicked man will do wicked things.
5. Will he cleanse himself in the same lake ? 6. She will make herself
ready to go. 7. I will cut down the trees that are in the field. 8. Wewill buy the same books for our children. 9. The Lord will guard
the souls of his people. 10. We will begin to sanctify our hearts.
11. The maiden will carry the loaves for the workmen. 12. Theywill hide themselves in the trees. 13. You will begin to wonder at
the power of the elders. 14. We shall not reveal ourselves to them.
15. Art thou willing to behold peace and righteousness in the kingdomof God ? 16. Shall we command them to read the Scriptures to the
brethren ?
THE FIRST AORIST ACTIVE 47
LESSON XVIII
THE FIRS.T AORIST ACTIVE
The First Aorist is so called to distinguish it from the Second
Aorist, a tense which has different endings, but practically always
the same meaning. Very few verbs have both Aorists.
The two Aorists may be compared in this respect with the strong
and weak forms of the Past tense in English. Very few verbs in
English have both a strong and a weak Past tense ; if they have, the
meaning of the two forms is identical.
Example: Present Strong Past Weak Past
Beseech Besought Beseeched
At present we are concerned only with the 1st Aorist; but whatever
is said about the meaning of this tense applies equally to the 2nd Aorist.
The name Aorist means unbounded or unlimited. The Aorist tense is
used in Greek to denote that the action spoken of is to be regarded
simply as an event, without any regard being taken of the length of
time during which it has been going on. The Present and Imperfect
tenses on the other hand emphasise the fact that the action spoken
of is continuous or often repeated. In practice it will be sufficient
for the present to translate the Aorist Indicative by the English Past
Simple, and the Imperfect generally by the English Past Continuous,
or Imperfect.
Example : eXvov 1 was loosing, or I used to loose.
fKvcra I loosed.
This distinction should be carefully observed.
The 1st Aorist of the verb \va is as follows
:
1st Aor
48 THE FIRST AORIST ACTIVE
As in the Future o- is inserted between the stem of the verb and the
endings. The characteristic vowel of the tense is a.
The a which is inserted before the endings of the 1st Aorist produces
consonantal changes similar to those produced by the a- inserted before
the endings of the Future.
Examples
:
Present
IMPEKATIVES. AOEIST INFINITIVE 49
Give us (keep on giving us) day by day our daily bread.
Tov apTov ^fjLWV Tov iiriovtTwv 8l8ov rffiiv to KaB* rjfiepav.
Lk. xi. 3.
Give to us this day our daily bread.
TOV SpTov fifiav TOV iiriovcriov bos rifiiv arj/iepov.
Mt. vi. 11.
The Present Imperative denotes a continuous act of giving—day
after day. The Aorist Imperative denotes a single act of giving—for
to-day.
Another good example is found in Jn ii. 16
:
Take these things hence (single action), do not continue to make myFather's house a house of merchandise.
apare^ TavTa evTevOev, pfj iroLdre tov oikov tov iraTpos p.ov oiKov
(piropiov.
The Aorist Infinitive
The Aorist Infinitive differs in meaning from the Present Infinitive
just in the same way as the Aorist Imperative differs in meaning from
the Present Imperative.
Its use denotes that the action denoted by the verb is to be regarded
simply as an action happening at some time not defined, without anyregard to its continuance or frequency.
The use of the Present Infinitive denotes that the action denoted
by the verb is to be regarded as continuous or repeated.
The Aorist Infinitive is consequently used more frequently than
the Present Infinitive in Greek : and the student should always use it
unless there is some good reason to the contrary.
It is Not confined to expressing action in past time like the Latin
Perfect Infinitive, it has therefore no augment since it is not regarded
as a past tense.
Examples
:
To keefp on writing the same things is good for you.
ypd<ji€LV Ta avTCL koXov eariv vpXv. (PreS. Inf.)
I hope to write to you soon.
eXiri'fo) ypdyjrai vfiiv Ta)(4a>s. (Aor. Inf.)
1 apa.T€ is an Aorist Imperative. Its form will be explained in the next
lesson but one.
N. 4
50 EXERCISES
Exercise 18
Revise Vocabularies 9-13.
1. eSia^av roiis Xr/aras oi airrfyov to. npo^ara. 2. oi 8e Xejrpot
iiriarfvaav ^ ra \6yto tov 'lij<roC. 3. ineiii^as roiis reXavas ayopdiTat xa
laaria, 4. trattrov to upyvptov ano Twv X^arwi/. 5. craiff tov Xaov (rov
diro TOV wovrjpov. 6. Ta^^drcacrai' ra |3i|3\ia f v ti5 icp^. 7. /ifTa Tavra
eneitrapev aiiToi/s Kpvyjrai ra Tratdia. 8, CKaBapifrafitv eavrovs ev Ta
iroTapa. 9. o bihaaKoKos airros iBavpaat ttju (To^'iav Tav paBrfraVi
10. f7rop€V€TO 8ia Trjs yrjs €KKoyj/ai to, 8ev8pa. 11. 8ia tovto ov fici
a-KavSdXi^fiv Toiis vwrovs. 12. /Sdorawoi' to wXoiov diro T^s daXairoi;c.
13. dyidcraTe eavrovs, iyyi^ei yap rj rjpepa tou Kvpiov. 14. fxtXcvafv
TOV Xf7rp6v 6 7rpo(t>riTris Kadapi(rai iavTOV ev rm 'lopddvj] iroTapa. 15.!]
(jxovfi TOV 'ladvov expose iv tt/ fpi)p<f ' eTotpMO-arf tj)v oSov tdS Kvpia.'
16. errjprjaapev Tas evToXds as rjKOvopev dno to)v dyuov drrotTToXav.
17. KaXov iariv ^pds irpdaaeiv rr/v hiKaioirvvrjv. 18. iiiovTo'^ avrov prj
Trpd^ai eavTca kokov. 19. ptTa tovto oZv dvea^ev tovs 6(l>BaXpovs tov
Tv<pXov. 20. eXnl^ets Setopelv tt}v bo^av twv dyyiXav, 21. ^ elprjvrj
KaToiKijcraTW Tas xapSias vp&v. 22. TavTa yap jjffeXrjaav /SXc^at oi
dyyeXoi.
1. They baptised the publicans in the river. 2. You were going
through the land to behold the houses and the people. 3. Hide the
stones in the field. 4. Do not continue to offend the brethren (use the
Pres. Imper.). H. Let them set the men in order. 6. You revealed
the commandments and promises to the church. 7. Shall we begin to
read the books ? 8. Cleanse your hearts, ye sinners, and confess your
sins to the church. 9. Is it lawful to heal on the Sabbath ? 10. Save
thy people, Lord, from the wickedness of this world. 11. Makeready therefore to hide yourselves and your children in Jerusalem.
12. Let love and righteousness dwell in yom- hearts. 13. He com-
manded me to write these words in a book. 14. It is good for them
to keep on reading the same things. 15. After this I will reveal mypower to the children of Israel. 16. He wished to call the publicans
to the marriage.
' TTiffTeiioi is often followed by a Dative.^ This verb is not contracted.
THE SECOND AORIST ACTIVE 51
LESSON XIX
THE SECOND AORIST ACTIVE. OBJECT CLAUSES AFTERVERBS OF SAYING, OR THINKING
The Endings of the Second Aorist Indicative Active are the Sameas those of the Imperfect Indicative Active. The Endings of the
2nd Aorist Imperative Active are the Same as those of the Present
Imperative Active. The Endings of the 2nd Aorist Infinitive Active
are the Same as those of the Present Infinitive Active.
The 2nd Aorist can only be distinguished from the Imperfect and
the. Present Imperative and Infinitive by the Stem.
The Imperfect and the Present Imperative and Infinitive are formed
from the present stem. The 2nd Aorist Indicative, Imperative and
Infinitive are formed from the verbal stem (see p. 43).
There is no difference in meaning between a 1st and a 2nd Aorist'
:
few verbs have both.
Take for example the verb ^dWa " I throw."
Verbal Stem ^a\. Present Stem |3aXX.
52 THE SECOND AORIST ACTIVE
Present
OBJECT CLAUSES 53
jraB cjraBov I suffered ird(rx<'>
e\6 ffkSov I came ipxafiai
ivtyK rjveyKov I carried (jiipa
The Imperative of fISov is 184, that of (Ittov is flwe, that of e^xov is
(rx^s, that of ij\6ov is A^e.
The Imperative of the other verbs is formed in the usual way.
Object clauses after verbs of saying or thinking
Object clauses after verbs meaning "to say" or "to think" are
sometimes expressed in Greek, as they nearly always are in English,
by a clause introduced by on, "that^", with a verb in the Indicative
mood.
Examples : They say that they hear the voice.
X4yov(TCV OTi aKOVOvai Tfjv (jiiovrip.
We believe that we beheld the temple.
7rt(Trevop.€v OTi €/3Xei/^a/iev to iepov.
In Greek however the Tense of the verb which was used by the
original speaker or thinker when he uttered the words or framed the
thought is always retained, and the verb in the object clause is not put
into a past tense as it is in English when the verb in the principal
clause is in a past tense. In English we say " The man said that he
heard the voice." The words that the man actually uttered were" T hear the voice." In Greek this present tense is retained and we write
o nvOpaiTOs enrfu ore aKOVfi rrjv (jxavrjv.
Again, in the sentence " The men believed that the slave was there,"
the thought that the men framed in their minds was "the slave is
there," consequently we translate this sentence into Greek as follows
:
ol avSpatiroL eTrioTcvaav on 6 fiouXdy eariv exei.
So in the following sentences :
He said that he had seen the boats. (I saw the boats.)
CiTrev on et8e Ta ir'Ko'La,
They thought that they had seen a vision. (We saw a vision.)
iuofita'av on ecdov otrTa(riav,
' N.B. oTt also means "because," as has been already mentionecl.
54 OBJECT CLAUSES. EXERCISES
In English the tense of the verb in the object clause is put one stage •
further into the past : the Past is used instead of the Present, and the :
Pluperfect instead of the Past. But in Greek the tense used by the
original speaker or thinker is always retained.
The student should always ask himself what were the original words
uttered, or the original thought framed, before trying to translate such
sentences as these.
Exercise 19
Learn Vocabulary 14.
1. jiera Tavra atridavtv 6 wTOixos. 2. e^rjfiev els to lepov ev cKeivr]
rfi apa. 3. e/iaOfS on epx^erm 6 KpiTrjs. 4. Si Kvpif, Tjp,apTov els (re.
5. fiSofiev oTi 6 TeXavrjs (ftipei to dpyvpiov ix t^s olxias. 6. iSe Tois
Seo'TToras Tijs yfjs. 7. yivao'Kopxv on o vios tov Beov riKBev els Tov
Koa-ftov (ra^eiv Toiis a/iapTioXovs. 8. eXirev on nlvoviri, tov olvov Koi
etrOtovo-i TOV aprov. 9. rjveyKopev tovs \iBovs dno rr/s daXdtra-rjs, 10. ra
bevbpa eiretre els tov dypov, 11. ot Xi^orat e^evyov utto Tav veaviav.
12. oi 8e 7rpo(j>TJTat efpvyov els ttjv eprjpov. 13. ev Tovra yivunTKopev rrjv
aydnrjv tov deov oti ewefiyjrev tov vlov avTov tov dyanrjTov els tov KOtrpov.
14. 0!jBi els Toiis dypoiis Koi \d^e tov xapnov dnu tS>v epyuTcov. 15. cyvmi'
OTL 6 Kvpios eirefiyjfe tov ayyeXov avrov trco^eiv pe, 16. eXSerto to. iraibia
TTpos pe. 17. etfropxv oti del naSelv avToiis TroXXa. 18. eidov on
riydyopev tov o)(Xov els Trjv (Tvvayayfp), 19. ecrxev to /3(^Xia tov dSeXtjmv
pov. 20. eyvapev oti TroXXa epaBov oi paBrfToi dfro tS>v dnoOToXav.
1. We cast ourselves into the river. 2. You received the garments
which the elders sent for the poor. 3. They fled from the face of the
judges. 4. After this the disciples knew that they had sinned (their
thought was "we sinned "). 5. This is the stone that fell from heaven.
6. The virgin brought forth a son, and they called him Jesus i. 7. Yefollow me, not because ye saw signs, but because ye ate the loaves.
8. The Son of man must suffer many things. 9. After these days we
went to Samaria. 10. Behold the Lamb of God. 11. He said that he
had learnt many things from the prophet. 12. We know that we must
suffer many things. 13. On this account they left the sheep in the
fields and fled. 14. He commanded the multitude to eat the bread
and drink the wine which the young men brought. 15. The prophet
^ Accusative case.
LIQUID VERBS, FUTURE AND AORIST 55
who had the book died in the wilderness. 16. We saw that the slaves
were carrying the boat to the lake (the thought was "they are carrying").
17. They said that the children had eaten the fruit (the words used
were " the children ate the fruit "). 18. They knew that the maidens
were in the house. 19. I heard that the apostles were going to
Jerusalem.
LESSON XX
THE FUTURE AND AORIST ACTIVE OP LIQUID VERBS.
TEMPORAL GLAUSES
The Future and Aorist of verbs whose stems end in a liquid letter
\ fi, V, p present some peculiarities.
(1) The present stem is longer than the verbal stem : (a) it has a
long vowel or a diphthong where the verbal stem has a short vowel, or
(6) it ends in XX where the verbal stem ends in X (except in the case of
o0fi'X(a).
(2) The Future Active and Middle instead of inserting <r before
their endings have endings like those of the Present of contracted
verbs in ea.
(3) The 1st Aor. Act. generally has a long vowel or diphthong in
the stem, and does not insert a- before its endings, but adds them
direct to the lengthened stem.
The following verbs of this class are important.
1st or 2ndPresent
56 TEMPORAL CLAUSES, nrapd
trwflpa (Tirep irirtpSy ((rnfipa I SOW
(palva (jiav ^avovpai I manliest
<j)6eipa> ipBep ^6fpS> fKJideipa I destroy
The compound forms of these verbs such as TrapayyeWa, iiralpet,
eK^aKKo), KaraKpivo) form their tenses in exactly the same way as the
uncompounded forms given above. The Future of dyyeWa is conjugated
as follows : dyyeXa, dyyikeis, ayye\el, dyyfXovpfv, ayyeXelre, dyye\ovin.
The 1st Aor. Imperat. is ayytiXov and the Infinitive is dyyciXai.
The other verbs are all conjugated in the same way.
Temporal Clauses, or clauses denoting time
A Temporal Clause denotes the time of the action of the verb in
the clause on which it depends.
Temporal clauses are introduced by ore or 6s meaning "when,"
e<ur meaning "while" or "until."
When a temporal clause refers to a single definite event its verb is
in the Indicative mood, just as in English.
N.B. Distinguish carefully between Sre " when," and on " that," or
" because."
Examples :
When he came to the sea he saw the ships.
ore rj\0f npos Trjv dd\a(r<Tav flBe ra ir\oia.
While he read the books he remained in the house.
eas dveyvco ra /3(/3Aia KaT(p,fiveii iv TJj oiKi'a.
He remained in the house until the slave came.
Karcpfiufv iv rfj olxia eai ^\6fV 6 SouXof.
The Preposition irapd
The root meaning of this preposition is Beside.
It is used with a noun or pronoun in the accusative, genitive, or
dative case.
When used with the Accusative case it denotes generally motion
to beside or motion along side of places.
Examples
:
6 8e tTTTopos enea'fv wapa rfju odov.
But the seed fell by the roadside.
o Sc Irjtrovs rjXBev napa rrfv 0d\a<TO-av Trjs rdKiKaiat.
But Jesus went along the side of the sea of Galilee.
n-apd. EXERCISES 57
When used with the Genitive case it denotes motion from beside
of persons. ,
Example : kol eyvaxrav on irapa aov €^rj\0ov.
And they knew that I came forth from Thee.
When used with the Dative it denotes rest beside and may betranslated "near," or "by," or "with," or "at the house of."
Example : e/ictvav Trap' aira Trjv fjiiipav cKelvrjv.
They remained with him that day.
Exercise 20
Learn Vocabulary 15.
1. ore fie ol aTpariarat rjK6ov els rrjv otKLav aTTTjyyeiKav otl airiareiKcv
aiiTOvs 6^ KopvTjXios. 2. KoraKptifova-LTas \rjpaf koI dTroKTevovat rareKva
avT&v fiaxatpa. 3. ov fxeveXre ev ra tott,^ tovtco aXX* aTroOavelaOe iv
TTj yji T&v €-j(6paiV vp.S)v, 4. ot airotTToKot, eff-ireipav tov \6yov iv Tois
KapSiais TOiv fiadrjraiv. 6. ^p€v ovv tov uravpov Koi ^XBev OTricra) tov
Irjaov. 6. eV eKelvco roS Kaip^ ol KpiTai eKpetvav Tas <j}v\as 'IcparjX,
7. e<f)delpapev Tas Kotpas al rjaav -rrapa Trjv Bakaaaav. 8. epetva eKft eais
aviyvm to jSjiSXiov. 9. ore fie aTrtKreivev 6 'HpmSijs to iraiSia iv BrjffKefp
KaTf(f}vy€v 6^ *Io)(ri7<^ els AtyvnTov (rvv Mapia. 10. dvvacrBe irteiv to
TroTYfpiov o fiei pe nielv ; 11. (jjavovpai to KpotrtoTTOv pov avTois Kal
^Xeyj/ova-L t^v Bo^av pov. 12. epelvaptv iv rc» icpto ewff (OKo86povv ol
epyarai tov Bpovov. 13. &s fie TJKOvtrav ravTa irapa t^s xVP^^ epeivav
Trap avTjj. 14. S^etXes dpyvptov toIs TfKwvaiS' 15. 6 fie *lT)rrovs eiTTfv
T(a irapdkvTiK^ ''Eyet/ae, apov ttjv kKivtjv aov Ka\ vnaye els t6v oIkov itov^
&s fie rfKOvaev TavTa ^pev Tr/v kXivtjv Kal vnrjyev, 16. aTreoTeiXa/xev tovs
dyyiXovs eTotpdaat ttjv ofioy. 17. 6 irpoffyTjTrjs enrev OTt TrdvTa hvvaTa
icTTi Trapa r<a Bfm'^. 18. TrnpijyyeiXa-re aiiTols prj <j)6eipai to. TrXom.
19. fiBi\rj(Tas ayeiv Ta Trpo^ara Trapa Tci fieVSpa. 20. jrapa Tols dvBpa-
TTOts dSvvaTov itTTiv aXX* ov Trapa roJ dea>, TrdvTa yap SvvaTU Tvapd ra
Bea. 21. Kai tovto rjKOvaaiiev nap' avTov otl fiet (f)t\e'lv Toits aSeX<^oiis
Tjpav. 22. ol ^apuraloL eXeyov oTi iaBUt Trapa dpapTtoXa.
1. Send the young men to rouse the soldiers. 2. Joseph took the
Child and Mary and departed into Egypt. 3. They shall not die in
' Proper nouus in Greek are often preceded by the article ; this article
must not be translated into English.- Trapi T<f fleij) etc. "near God"; translate "with God," or "to God."
58 THIRD DECLENSION, CONSONANT ENDINGS
the wilderness, for the soldiers will save them. 4. I will manifest
myself to my servants (use doiXoc) at that time, saith the Lord.
5. The Pharisees went to eat bread at the house of the prophet^.
6. This is impossible with men, but it is possible with God. 7. WhenHerod heard these words he sent his servants to destroy the children
in Bethlehem with the sword. 8. They remained in the house while
the paralytic took up his bed. 9. We announced that the apostle was
staying (use fieva>) in the house of Cornelius. 10. Take up thy cross
and carry it after me. 11. You ought not to condemn these widows.
12. I shall cast the sword into the lake. 13. When the disciples cameto the village they sowed the word in the hearts of the people.
14. The Son of man (insert the article before " of man ") must suffer
many things. 15. I heard this from (napd) the prophet who lives
(/levm) at the house of the widow in Bethlehem. 16. Wilt thou not
slay the wicked, Lord? 17. They wished to throw the stones beside
the temple. 18. The Pharisees said that the disciples of John did not
eat with publicans and sinners (use napd).
LESSON XXI
THE THIRD DECLENSION
The third declension contains all nouns which do not belong to the
first or second declension.
The stems of third declension nouns end (1) in a consonant, (2) in
a vowel, generally i, v or ev.
(1) TMrd. Declension nouns with stems ending in a consonant.The endings of these nouns when masculine or feminine are as
follows ;
Singular Plural
Nom.
THIRD DECLENSION, EXAMPLES 59
These endings are added to the stem. The stem is found by takingaway the ending of the Genitive Singular.
Examples : Nominative Genitive StemVV^ night VVKTOS VVKT
irais boy TrmSos waiS
apxav ruler apxovros dp^ovT
The following are examples of the declension of nouns of the third
declension.
60 THIRD DECLENSION, CONSONANT ENDINGS
Plural
Nom.
62 THIRD DECLENSION, VOWEL ENDINGS
being sent for the children by the widows. 10. The shepherds called
their own sheep, and they came after them. 11. Unless we eatjthe
flesh of the Son of man we shall have no life in ourselves. 12. Here
will I dwell for ever, saith the Lord.
LESSON XXII
NOUNS WITH STEMS ENDING IN A VOWEL, ETC.
NEUTER NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.
(2) Nouns of the Third Declension with stems ending in a
vowel.
These nouns have stems ending in t, v, or ev.
Examples
:
(-5)
THIRD DECLENSION, NEUTER AND IRREGULAR 63
Notice that as in the case of neuter nouns of the 2nd declension the
Nominative, Vocative, and Accusative cases have the same endings,
and the Nominative, Vocative, and Accusative Plural end in a.
Decline like ypdiifia the words given in the vocabulary, and also
Trip, TTvpos, fire ; ripas, Tcparos, a wonder ; <j)S)s, cjxotos, light ; which
are all neuter.
Neutee Nodns with Stems Ending in «
The final s of the stem appears only in the Nominative singular,
and there the es is changed to os.
In the other cases r is dropped and the two vowels thus brought
together are contracted.
Example : Stem yfi/es with Genitive ending added becomes yivea-os,
when the s is omitted it becomes yeveos, and this is contracted to
yexous. The same takes place in the other cases.
Singular Plural
Nom. Voc. Ace. yevos a race yevr/
Gen. yevovs yeviav or yfvau
Dat. ytVa yeveai
The nouns of this class which occur most frequently in the N. T.
are given in the vocabularies. They must be carefully distinguished
from nouns of 2nd declension ending in os which are nearly all
masculine.
Irregular nouns of the Third Declension
The declension of the following nouns should be noted : they are
contracted in the Dat. and Gen. Sing, and have the Voc. Sing, the
same as the stem.
TraTTjp 6
64 THIRD DECLENSION, IRREGULAE
The following is the declension of dvrip, a man.
Singular Plural
Nom. dvrjp avSpfS
Voc. avep avSpes
Acc. avSpa avSpas
Gen. dvSpos dvtpav
Dat. dvSpi dvSpaa-i
The following nouns should also be specially noticed :
Nominative
ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION 65
1. This man did signs and wonders in the city. 2. Behold myhands and my feet. 3. Ye are the light of the world. 4. The womanwas wiping {i^ijuxa-tre) the feet of Jesus with her hair. 5. Our fathers
did eat the manna {to fiawa) in the wilderness. 6. He touched the
ear of the deaf man with his hand. 7. The king sent this woman to
bring her father from the city. 8. He was seeking his mother and
his daughter. 9. The Holy Spirit shall remain with them for ever.
10. Thou sayest that thou knowest the will of God. 11. The dogs
ate the fish which I took out of the water. 12. In that year myfather went through your city. 13. The scribes would not receive
baptism for' the remission of their sins. 14. I read the letters which
he wrote by the hand of his wife. 15. Your cities are destroyed with
fire. 16. We bowed (eKa/ii/^nfiew) our knees to the king. 17. woman,
depart in peace, for I will heal thy daughtei'.
LESSON XXIII
ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION,IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES
Adjectives of the third declension have only two terminations,
because the feminine is the same as the masculine.
The two principal forms of these adjectives are declined as follows
:
akrjBrjs^ true
Stem aKrjdfs
66 IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES
IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES 67
Great care must be taken to distinguish els "one" (maso.) from"to," and h "one" (neuter) from tV "in."
Masc. Fern. Neut.
68 FIRST AOEIST PASSIVE
avTovs. 12. fiijSfir crKavSaKileTio tva tSiv iralStov toutiov. 13. oi hi
yovfts avTov ovk eyvatrav on jiivei iv rfj TrdXet. 14. oix V ypa<t>'l (nrev on
fK rov a-irepfuiTos AavfiS, (cai diro Bij^Xec/u t^j Kajiijs Snov tjv AaveiS,
cpX^Tui 6 Xpurrm; 15. cv eKfivt/ rrj &pq (rvvdyovToi aira ttoXXoI t&v
dpxiepeav ot Xiyavtriv on ovk earm dvaaTatris.
1. Thou shalt open my mouth, Lord, and my tongue shall praise
thy name. 2. Didst not thou sow good seed in thy field ? 3. Do not
carry any (use fiijSfi's) sick man to the synagogue on the Sabbath day.
4. If thou wilt, thou art able to heal me. 5. I came into,this world
for (els) judgement. 6. One of the lepers, when he saw that he was
healed, cast himself at his feet. 7. The high priests knew that this
saying was true. 8. All the disciples were full of faith and of the
Holy Spirit, and they healed the sick, and cast out many devils.
9. None of the priests believes that there is a resurrection. 10. Myparents built many houses in this city. 11. Let no one love darkness
more than light. 12. When they came to the villages they preached
the Gospel to all the Gentiles who dwelt there. 13. If I judge, myjudgement is true. 14. When the disciples of John heard that he was
dead, they came and took up his body.
LESSON XXIV
THE FIRST AND SECOND AORIST PASSIVE.THE FUTURE PASSIVE
The conjugation of the First Aorist Passive is as follows :
Indicative
FUTURE AND SECOND AORIST PASSIVE 69
Tlie conjugation of the Future Passive is as follows : it is formed by
adding 6ri<r to the stem of the verb and putting after it the endings of
the Present Passive.
Infinitive
"KvBria-ea-dai to be about
to be loosed.
Indicative
Xtiflifo-ofiat I shall be loosed etc.
\v8ri<reTai
\v6rjiT6fieBa
\v6fi(Tf<r6f
\v$T)(TOVTai
The presence of the letter 6 at the beginning of the endings of these
tenses causes certain consonantal changes which may be summarised
as follows :
K., y, X followed by 6 become ^fl,
IT, ^, (^ followed by 6 become (f>d,
T, 8, 6 followed by d become ad.
In the contracted verbs the short vowel is lengthened before 6.
Examples
:
1st Aor. Pass.
eirpd)(6rjv
inel(r6r]v
The Second Aorist Passive does not occur very frequently in the
N.T. Its endings are practically the same as those of the First Aorist
Passive with the exception that the 6 is omitted. The 2nd Aor. Pass,
of <t)aiv<o is given below.
Present
70 AORIST AND FUTURE PASSIVES
The following are some of the Second Aorists Passive found' in
the N.T.
iypa<liT]v "I was written" from ypa^a
iK.pv^T)v "I was hidden" from Kpiwra
ea-irdprjv "I was sown" from a-ireipa
ea-TaXtjv "I was sent" from trreXKo)
earpdtfnjv "I was turned" from a-Tpitjxo
f(l)6dpriv "I was destroyed" from ^6fipa>
The following important verbs have irregular forms of the 1st Aoriat
and Future Passive.
Present
EXERCISES 71
fia^ev 6 ox^oSj eXcyov 8e iroWoi OTI^ Tavra to, repara oiiK €irpd)(67] iv Tois
^fiepais Toyv irareptav fjfiSiv. 7. fi^ra Tavra at(j>dr] jrao'i Tois airofTToKois,
8. eKeXeuo-f rov avdpa eVe;^^^i'at 8ta t^s noKetas, 9. ev eKeivij rrj rjfiepa
iras 6 Xaoff K\r]6rj<rerat dytos ra Kvpta^ 10. at yvvaiKes TrapeKXrjBrjo'av
turo tSiv dvSp&v avrav. 11. iroifjira to. prj/uiTd jxm) aROVcrBrjvai vtto tov
/SaortXeW. 12. ovbeis tS)v dyyeXav dKOvtrBrjaerai. 13. irdvTfs ol l)(6ies
iff\ridr]<rav els TO vS(op. 14. ravTacpprjOj] 8ia a-TofiaTos Aaveid. 15. irep.-
fpdrjTca €is rS>v iepeav ireWetv rov ^aaiXea. 16. 0T€ Kapirov eTToirja-e to
Kokov CTTreppu €(j>dvrj Kalrd ^t^dvLa^. 17. Zi^ao'tKev^^CKii}6r)tTeiVTr6 iravTos
TOV yevovs. 18. rd aaifxaTa tcov dyltov (CFTrdpr} iv nTifiia^^ iyepdrja-eTai
Se ev 86^7], 19. iKKr)6r)T€ d^poves vtto r5)v vo^SiV tov alatvos tovtov.
1. All this nation was called righteous (neut. agreeing with yei/os)^
2. Many of these words were written in a book by the high priest.
3. The fish were taken by these boys. 4. We were sown in weakness
(da-ffeveia), we shall be raised in power. 5. If the devil shall be cast
out the crowd will wonder. 6. The good seed was carried to the fields.
7. I was sent by one of the king's servants to seek for thee. 8. Weknow that this Gospel shall be preached to all the Gentiles, and that
many will hear. 9. In that day many bodies of the saints arose (were
raised), and came into the city, and appeared to many. 10. We wish
those sheep to be driven to the hills. 11. Thou shalt be saved by
faith and hope, if thou wilt abide in them. 12. You commanded the
stones to be cast into the water. 13. All these things shall be done in
the darkness. 14. Ye have heard that it was said by our fathers
" Thou shalt not make an image of the Lord thy God°." 15. We were
called foolish' by many of the rulers of the Gentiles, but we know that
the words which we speak are true.
* on must not be translated, it is often used to introduce the exact words
of a speaker, like our inverted commas, Syntax 158.3 fi^Kio "tares."* h inidq. " in dishonour."5 Syntax 11.* See note 2 on the Greek exercise.' " foolish," plural, Syntax 11.
72 PARTICIPLES
LESSON XXV
PARTICIPLES
Participles are verbal adjectives sharing the characteristics both of
verbs and adjectives.
As a verb a participle has a subject, and, if it is the participle of a
transitive verb in the active voice, it may have an object. It has also
tense and voice.
As an adjective it agrees with the noun which it qualifies, that is
with its subject, in number, gender and case.
The active participles are declined with 3rd declension endings in
the masculine and neuter, and Ist declension endings in the feminine.
They are as follows :
FIRST AORIST PARTICIPLE 73
First Aorist Participle Active
N.V.
A.
G.
D.
Singular
\va-as
Xvaavra
XvfravTOs
XvtravTt
\virav
\vaav
XviravTOs
XvtrauTi
Plural
XvtravTes \va-airai\viTa<Ta
Xvtrcurau
Xvtrdcrrjs
XvtrdtTrj
The present participles active of the contracted verbs in ew are
declined as follows :
XvfravTas
Xva-dvrtop
Xv(Tao'L
Xv<rd(Tas
Xvaaaav
Xv(rd(raLS
XvtravTa
XvaavTa
XvardvTav
Xutracrt
N.V. cjitXav cl>i,Xov<ra (^(Xo£i>
A. <j)tXovvTa (jjiXovcrav (jitXovv
G. (jjiXovvTOS <^iXov(Tris rjitXoiivTos
The present participle of elfil is declined like Xiav
etc.
N.V. &v
A. SvTU
G. OVTOS
ovtra
ovfxav ov
ovros etc.
The present participle middle and passive is declined like anadjective of the 2nd declension. The aorist participles passive are
declined with 3rd declension endings in the masculine and neuter and1st declension endings in the feminine.
Pres. Part. Mid. and Pass. Xvo/jifvos, ri, ov
1st Aor. Part. Pass. Xvdels, de'ura, 6iv
2nd Aor. Part. Pass. <jiaveiSi eiffa, iv
being loosed
loosed, or having been
loosed
having appeared
The 1st Aor. Part. Pass, is declined as foUovys :
Singular Plural
N.V. Xvdcis Xvdeicra Xv64v XvBivTis Xvdelcrai Xudivra
A. XvBivra Xv6ei(rav Xvdiv Xvdevras Xv6eio-as XvBivra
G. Xv64vTO^ XvSeioTjs XvBevTos Xvdevrav XvOeiaStv XvBivTtov
D. XvOevTi XvBela-Tj XvBevTi XvBs'iai XvBeitrais XvBeifri
Participles are generally negatived with /xij in the New Testament.
Participles are used much more frequently in Greek than in English.
They may be used either Adjectivally or Adverbially.
74 ADJECTIVAL AND ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES
1. The Adjectival Participle.
In this use the adjectival side of the participle is most prominent.
The adjectival participle is generally preceded by an article with which
it agrees. The participle preceded by an article is very common in
the New Testament. It should generally be translated by a clause
introduced by a relative pronoun, but may sometimes be translated
by a noun.
Examples :
oi iruTTevovTes those who believe, or believers,
d (TireLpav the sower.
They that hunger and thirst after righteousness.
01 ireLvatvTes^ Kal 8f,ylfS)VT€S^ ttjv 8iKcuoavifr]v. Mt. V. 6.
This is he that was sown by the way side.
o^os e(TTLV 6 Trapa Trjv odov arnapeis. Mt. xiii. 19.
Notice that any number of qualifying words may be inserted
between the article and the participle.
2. The Adverbial Participle.
In this use the verbal side of the participle is most prominent.
"When a participle is used adverbially it is equivalent to an
Adverbial Clause modifying some other verb in the sentence.
Such participles are best translated into English by a suitable
adverbial clause. The context must decide what kind of adverbial
clause the participle in question is equivalent to. In the New Testa-
ment an adverbial participle is generally equivalent to a Temporal ^
clause, sometimes to a Causal ^ clause, rarely to a Concessive^ clause.
Examples : (a)_ A participle denoting the time of the action of the
main verb, translated by a Temporal clause in English.
And when he came out, he saw a great multitude.
Km i^f\6o>v eibiv ttoXvv o^\ov. Mt. xiv. 14.
And when the chief priests and Pharisees had heard his parables,
they knew that he spoke about them.
Koi aKovtravres oi dp^^tepels Kal ol ^apt(raiot ras napa^oXas avTOV
eyvaxrav on nepX airwv \eyei. Mt. xxi. 45.
Generally speaking, the Present Participle denotes action taking
place at the same time as the action of the main verb, and the Aorist
^ For these forms see lesson 28.'' See appendix on English Grammar.
ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES 75
Participle denotes action which took place before the action of themain verb.
Examples. Present Participle :
He appeared to them as they were fighting.
&(l)dri avTols fiaxofifvois. Acts vii. 26.
Aorist Participle :
And having fasted forty days and forty nights he afterwards
hungered.
KaL vrfareva'as rj[j,€pas T€tr(rapa.KovTa Koi TeiraapaKovTa vvKras vtjrepov
ineivatrev. Mt. iv. 2.
Present Participle :
He that has ears to hear let him hear.
6 e^wv SiTa CLKOveiv aKoveTot.
Aorist Participle :
But he that had been healed did not know who it was.
6 8e laBcls^ oIk jfSfi^ ri's iariv. Jn v. 13.
(6) Participle denoting the cause of the action of the main verb
translated by a Causal clause in English.
Examples :
And they were all afraid of him, because they did not believe that
he was a disciple.
KCLL 7rdvT€S e<j>o^QVVTO aiiTov, /if] 7ri(rT€vovT€S OTi ecTTiv p.a9rjTr)S.
Acts ix. 26.
Godliness is profitable for everything, because it has a promise for
the life that is now, as well as for that which is to come.
^ 8e eiire^fia npos navra aKJieXi/ios iariv, fTrayyeXtaK txovfra fffl^r T^f
vvv Kol rfjs fieXKmjarjs. 1 Tim. iv. 8.
The Participle often denotes the attendant circumstances of an
action, and may be best translated into English by a finite verb
joined to that which is the main verb in Greek by "and."
Examples :
He answered and said....
dnoKpideis eiirev....
' See Lesson 28. ^ See Lesson 36.
76 ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES
Immediately the father of the child cried out and said....
€v6vs Kpd§as 6 Trarrip tov TratSlov cKeyev .... Mk ix. 24.
Take Mark and bring him with thee.
MapKov avoKafimv aye jieTa (reavrov. 2 Tim. iv. 11.
In some cases however it is better to translate the Greek participle
by an English participle. The method of translation which sounds
best in English must be chosen.
Examples :
In those days John the Baptist came into the wilderness of Judea
preaching and saying "Repent."
6V Se TCLis fifiepais eKslvaif wapaylyveToi ^ItadvTjs 6 BanTiaTrjs Kijpvtrirav
iu Tfi eprjpa Trjs 'lovdaiaf, \eyav MeTavoeire.
And they were baptised by him in the river Jordan, confessing their
sins.
KoX e^airTi^ovTO vn avTOv iv ra 'lop^dvij norafia i^OfioXoyovfievoi ras
dp-aprias airav. Mt. iii. 6.
Exercise 25
Learn Vocabulary 19.
1. Koi napdycov irapd Trjv SaKaaaav ttjs ToKCKalas eldev Sipava koi
'AvSpeav tov dSfX(jfroi' Sipavos dpxl>i^dWovTas iv tji BaXdaoTi. 2. kcu.
r]K6ev Krjpvfra-mv els Tas trvvayayas avrav koi Saipovia CK/SdXXaiv. 3. ttSs
8uo";(oXa)s^ ol to ;fp^/iara e^ovTes els rrjv ^atriKeiav tov Beov eltTeXevfrovrat.
4. Koi 'qaav ol (^aydxTfr tovs aprovs 7rei/T-aKj(rxiX«ot avSpes. 5. oi pev olv
SiairnapivTes 8ir)\6ov fvayyeXi^opevoi tov \6yov. 6. irapayevopevos 8e
els 'lepova-dXrip eTreipa^e KoWdvBai^ Tots padrjTals, Koi wdvres etfio^ovvro
avTov, prj •mtTTevovTes oTt ioTiv padrjTTjs. 7. aKovatv be 'Avavlas Toiis
\6yovs TovTOvs irefTwv e^eyjrv^ev^' koi eyevero <j)6^os piyas eTri* irdvras
TOVS aKovovTas. 8. Kaitrirapd^av^ avTOV TonvevpaTO d<ddapTOV^Kai<^(Avri-
vav (fxavij peydXij, i^rjkBev i^ avTOv. 9. koi rjv iv Trj iprjpa) TeiTtrapaKOVTa
Tfpepas Kol TeircapaKovTa vvktus neipa^opevos vtto tov Saravd. 10. vpels
oSv dKov<raTe ttjv irapa^oXifv tov inrelpavTos. 11. icai &(j>8ri avTois
M(av(rrjs Koi ^HXeias avvXdKovVTes peT avTov.
1 Swx^Xus "with difficulty, hardly."^ KoWaaBai. "to join himself," see Lesson 28.^ ^itj/v^ev "gave up the ghost," from iK^ixu.* iiri "upon."^ trrapd^av 1st Aor. part, from (TTapdaaw.
GENITIVE ABSOLUTE 77
Partioiplea should be used to translate all the words marked *,
and also all the English participles.
1. Those that had preached* the word were scattered abroad.
2. And passing by the sea of Galilee the disciples taught many people.
3. Blessed are those that hear* and those that believe* the words of
this book. 4. Many of the publicans therefore were baptised confess-
ing their sins. 5. But he answered* and said " How hardly shall ye
enter into the kingdom of heaven." 6. The sower* soweth the word.
7. And when he came forth* he saw a great multitude. 8. And all
those that heard* kept these words in their hearts. 9. But we were
afraid because we did not believe* that his words were true. 10. This
is he that was sent* by the king. 11. While they were teaching* the
people they remained in the temple. 12. And having come out of the
city he went to another place. 13. But the prophet cried and said*
"Behold the man that cometh* after me: him shall ye hear."
14. When the governor therefore heard* this he was afraid and all
that were* with him. 15. And when they had cast* the net into the
sea they took many fishes. 16. And when they had come* to Bethlehem
they tried to enter into the synagogue, but those that kept* it cast themout. 17. But while I was walking* through the fields I saw a great
light from heaven and heard a voice speaking to me. 18. The prophet
remained in the mountain forty days^ and forty nights writing the words
of this law.
LESSON XXVI
THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE. INTERROGATIVE ANDINDEFINITE PRONOUNS. CERTAIN PREPOSITIONS
A noun or pronoun and a participle may stand by themselves in
the Genitive case if the noun or pronoun does not denote the same
person or thing as the subject or object of the sentence.
This construction is called the Genitive Absolute.
Absolute means " loosed," from the Latin " absolutus ': phrases of
this kind are called " absolute " because they are loosed in construction
from the rest of the sentence.
1 Days and nights, use Ace. case, Syntax 18.
78 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN
The Genitive Absolute should generally be translated by an adverbial
clause in English. The context must decide whether this clause is to
be Temporal, Causal, or Concessive. Most of the Genitives Absolute
in the New Testament may best be translated by Temporal clauses.
Examples
:
And when the devil was oast out the dumb man spoke.
Kal eK^\r)devTOs TOv baijiovlov i\d\rj<T€v 6 Ka(f>6s. Mt. ix. 33.
And while the bridegroom tarried they all slumbered and slept.
^ovL^ovTOS Se 7-ou vvfiffiiov ivvara^av neural kcu indOevSov.
Mt. XXV. 5.
The same construction is found in Latin, but the case there used is
the Ablative. A similar construction is also rarely found in English,
but in that language the case used is the Nominative.
Example : " This done, he went home."
N.B. The rule given above as to the noun or pronoun in a Genitive
Absolute not referring to the same person or thing as the subject or
object of the sentence is generally observed in Classical Greek. But it
is frequently broken in New Testament Greek as the following examplewill show :
And as he was coming out of the temple, one of his disciples said to
him...
Kdi exwopevofievov avTOv ex TOv iepov \iyei aira els tS>v fiaBrfrav avTov...
Mk xiii. 1.
The Interrogative Pronoun ris who ? W what ? can take the place
of either a noun or an adjective.
It is declined as follows :
Singular Plural
Maso. Fern. Neut. Masc. Fein. Neut.
N. Ti9 Ti rives riva
A. Tiva Ti Tivas TLva
G. TWOS tIvos t'ivwv Tivav
D. tLvi Tivi rlcn t'utl
Examples of its use :
Whom do I hear? rivas aKoim;What men do I hear? rlvas av6panovs aKoua;
CERTAIN PREPOSITIONS 79
The Indefinite Pronoun m is generally translated by " some " or
"any."
It is distinguished from m Interrogative by having no accent', and
by the fact that it cannot stand as the first word in a sentence.
It is declined in the same way as ris Interrogative.
Examples of its use :
Some one says this. toCto Xeyn tk.
A certain man says this. avBpanos ns tovto Xeyfi.
The following prepositions present some difficulty :
Kara, root-meaning down.
Kara is followed by the Accusative or Genitive case. When followed
by an Accusative it means " down along, throughout, with regard to,
according to," when followed by a Genitive it means "down from,
The meanings underlined are the commonest in the New Testament.
Examples :
Take him and judge him according to your law.
\a^ere avrov Vfieisy Koi Kara rhv vofiav vfjMV Kplvere avTOv,
Jn xviii. 31.
He that is not with me is against me.
6 firf atv ^6r' ep-ov Kar ejLtov ecrrtV. Lk, XI. 23.
Notice the following special phrases :
car' ovap in a dream.
KOTO. Kaipov in due season.
Kad' fjiiipav daily.
KOT ISiav privately.
€iri, root-meaning upon.
cVi is followed by the Accusative, Genitive or Dative case. It is
difficult to draw any clear distinction between its meanings with these
three cases, but with the Accusative it means "upon," "on," or "to"
often with some idea of motion, with the Genitive it means " upon,"
"on," and occasionally "in the time of," "in the presence of," with the
Dative it means "on," or "at."
Examples :
And other fell on good ground.
aXKa 6c eireaev ewl Trjv yijv ttjv Koh'jv. Mt. xiii. 8.
1 It is an " enclitic "; see page 166.
80 CERTAIN PREPOSITIONS
Take my yoke upon you.
dpare tov ^vyop fiov i(^ vfiaS' ^^- ^^' ^9,
And seeing one fig tree on the road he went to it.
teal Idaiv avKTJv fiiav eiri t^s oSoO rjKdep cjt avrriv.
Mt. xxi. 19.
I have glorified thee upon the earth.
iya> ac e86^a<ra iiri Tfjs y^r. Jn xvn. 4.
In the time of Elisha the prophet.
fVi 'EXt<raiou tov 7rpo(jyriTov. Lk. iv. 27.
And they wondered at him.
Koi iBaijia^ov in avT^. Mk xii. 17.
Know that it is near at the doors.
yiva)tTKtT€ on eyyvs etrriv eVl dvpats. Mk xiii. 29.
npos, root-meaning towards.
wpos is followed by the Accusative, Genitive or Dative case, but it is
so rarely followed by a Genitive or Dative case in the New Testament
that it will be sufiicient to regard it as a preposition followed only by
the Accusative case.
It means "towards, up to, to, with regard to," and in certain cases
"with," it is also used after verbs meaning "to say" where a simple
Dative would have been expected.
Examples :
In the fourth watch of the night he went to them walking on the
sea.
TfTaprr] Se ipvXaKJj Trjs vvktos ^\6eu npos avToiis irfpinarmv in\ Tfjv
BaKaaaav. Mt. xiv. 25.
And Jesus said to Simon "Fear not."
KOI flitfv npos TOV 2ipMiva 'irjirovs Mij cjio^ov. Lk. v. 10.
The word was with God.
o \6ryos ^v nphs tov deov. Jn i. 1.
See the Appendix on Prepositions.
Exercise 26
ALearn Vocabulary 20.
1. CTi 8e \aKovvTos tov Herpov to pruiara ravra, enecrev to nvevpa to
&yiov en\ ndvTas Toits aKOVOVTas TOV \6yov, 2. rj yap vap^ €niBvp,ei Kara
TOV nvevp.aTos Koi to nvfUfM Kara t^s capKos. 3. iyyi/s 8e offirijj AvSSas
EXERCISES 81
TTJ loTTTTiy, 01 lioBrfTiu aKovtTavTfs OTi HeTpos eiTTiv ev avTTJ, aTTctrTftXav 8io
avopas irpos avTov. 4. 6 fie cttI ra TriTpatdrj^ tnrapeLS, ovtos eariv 6 top
\6yov aaovaVf KaX tvdvs pcra ^apds Xap-^dvav aiirov. 5. ava^atpovvrtav fie
avrSsv, ifioii SyyeKos Kvpiov <j)aivfTai kut ovap T<f \<i>iri)^ \iyav IlapaXajSe
TO iraibiov Kai rrpi p,r]Tipa airoC, KOi (peiye els AiyvnTov. 6. i^eir\ri(T<rovTO
fie oi o;^Xot eVt r^ 8i8a)(jj avTOv, 7. dWa XTjfiyjretrBe^ hvvap,iv, eKOovTOS
Tov dyiov TTveifiaTOS c<f>' vfids. 8. Ka5' ripjpau fie npotrenapTepovv ofioBv-
pxihov^ iv T^ Up^. 9, Kai oylfovrai^ tov vlov tov dvdpaTTOv ipxofievov eTTt
T&v v€<l>e\<av TOV ovpavov. 10, tis ck tow hvo eTroirjtrev to BeKqpu tov
iraTpos; 11. Tore iTpo(Tr\k6cv aiira yvvfj tis aiT-oCtra tl nap' aiiToii, 6 fie
etnev avTij Ti deXeif ;
B
1. eV dp^^iepdajs^Avva Ka\ Ka£a(^a eyeveTO pjjfia deov eVt *ladvvrju tov
/.a^apiov ev t^ epfjfi(0. 2. effi TavTrj t^ jrerpa otKotoprjaw pov Trjv eicicXij-
iTiav. 3. oi Se dp\iepets xal to avveSpiov oKov e'^rjTovv yjfevSopapTvpiav^
KOTa TOV 'lijo-oC. 4. Ka6' fjpepav rjpr]v irpos vpus ev Tffl iepa xal ovK
eKparrjaaTe pe. 5. etfiev 6 *l7;a"o£;ff TTvevpa deov KOTa^atvov oxrel Trepi-
(TTepdv^ ep\6pevov eV avTov, 6. Kol SavpatravTes eirX ttj diroKpltTei avTOV
eaiyrjo'av'' . 7. 6 pfj i>v per e'pov kot epov eanv. 8. Kai e<T7r\ayxvl<T0ri^
en' aiiTOLS Kai edepdnevaev TLvas aiiT&v. 9. vpets Kara ttjv trdpKa KpiVere,
eyoi fie Kpivo) ovdeva, 10. Kai aTr^X^ew Kad oXi/v T^v noXiv Krfpvtrirtav otra
enoiTjo'ev avTca 6 'irjaovs. 11. Kai &pprjo'ev^ fj dyeXrj^^ KaTa tov Kprjpvov^^
els Trpi 6aKa(raav. 12. Ka\ anrjKBov Tives tS>v a-vv fjplv en\ to pvirfpeXov.
13. Kvpie, el arv el, Kekevaov pe e\detv npos ire eVi ra vSara. 14. Kai
el<rri\6ev KaTa to eltodos avTt^^^ ev rfj rjpepa tS>v o-a^ffaTav els ttjv a-vva-
yayyipr. 15. eViOTara, fii' oXijf vvktos KonidaavTes ovSev eXd/So/xex, eVl
fie Tco prjpaTi (TOv ^aXdooi^^ Ta biKTva. 16. 6 fie emev npos aiiTOvs
'Aytovi^effSe^^ elareXdeiv fiia ttjs aTevrjs 6vpas.
' tA nerpiiS^ "the rooky ground."2 "K-fipij/eade, future deponent from Xap^dva.' ofioSvpaddv "with one accord."* Stj/ovTai, a deponent future given as the future of 6pd<a.
' \pevSopapTvplav "false witness."" iiael irepiffrepdv "like a dove."' iaiyiiaav "they became silent."
'
* iffirXayxvlo'Sv " he was moved with compassion."' wpp-qirev "rushed." " ri dyiX-ij "the herd."1' Tou Kfrtipvov "the cliff.' '^ rd elui9bs airif "his custom."1' Xa\dau "I will let down." " ayavl^eoSe "strive."
N. 6
82 FIRST AORIST MIDDLE
Tlie clauses marked * should be translated hy a Oenitive absolute.
1. And when the disciples had entered into the ship* Jesus sent
the multitudes away. 2. Then a certain man came to him and said
"What art thou doing here?" 3. What power shall we receive whenthe Holy Spirit comes upon us*? 4. The day is drawing near iil which
the Son of man shall come upon the clouds of Leaven. 5. Take and
judge these men according to your law. 6. Peter went to him, walking
upon the water. 7. The disciples began to preach in the days of
Oaiaphas the high priest. 8. They weiit into the assembly on the
Lord's day according to custom. 9. I was with you daily in Jerusalem.
10. The high priest therefore said to the disciples "Who gave youauthority to do these things?" 11. The Pharisees will say manythings against the Son of man. 12. When the messengers of Herodhad departed* the disciples told him privately all that they had done.
13. But although he sent his own son to them* they would not receive
him. 14. You were astonished at his promises. 15. And when wehad toiled all the night* Jesus came to us walking on the sea. 16. Andwhile he was holding my hand* I received power to walk. 17. Who is
able to endure these things? 18. And while we were drawing near to
the city* the whole nmltitude began to rejoice saying "Blessed' is he
that oometh in the name of the Lord." 19. In the days of Herod the
king Joseph went down^ into Egypt taking with him the child Jesus
and Mary his mother.
LESSON XXVII
THE FIRST AND SECOND AORIST MIDDLE. THECOMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. ADVERBS
The conjugation of the First Aorist Middle is as follows :
Indicative Imperative
IKviraiajv I loosed (for myIkiaa own benefit) etc. XSo-oi loose (for thy owneXu<raTO Xvcraa-Ba) benefit) etc.
eKvtratrOe \vtraa$€
IKvuavTo \v(ra(rdaa'av
'Kvtrdadoiv
' eiKoyrmivos. » koW/Sij.
SECOKB AORIST MIDDLE §3
Infinitive Participle
\v(Taa-dai to loose (for one's Auo-d/iei/or, rj, ov having
own benefit) loosed (for one's own benefit)
Notice the presence of the a-a, the distinguishing mark of the First
Aorist.
The endings of the Second Aorist Indicative Middle are the same
as those of the Imperfect Passive. The endings of the other moods are
the same as the corresponding riioods of the Present Passive. Theendings are however not added to the present stem, but to the verbal
stem, as explained on page 43.
The Second Aorist of yivofim " I become " is as follows
:
Indicative Imperative
iyevofirjv I was etc.
eyivov yevQv be etc.
iyeveTO yeveuoco
iyevofieda
iy4ve(T6e yevea-df
eyevovTO yevetrdcoaav
y€ve(rd(ov
Infinitive Participle
yevfo-Bm to be, to come to yevo/ievos, rj, ov being, com-
pass ing to pass, happening
This word is especially common in the New Testament : it is an
example of a verb which is deponent in the Middle voice.
The form which occurs most frequently is iyivcTo "it came to pass."
Most of the Middle forms which are found in the N.T. are deponent,
and mast therefore be translated by an active verb in English.
In a few cases verbs are found in the Middle voice which denote
that the subject is acting upon himself, or in some way that concerns
himself, or is allowing something to be done to himself.
Examples are found in sentences 8, 13, 14 in the following exercise A.
The comparison of Adjectives
There are three degrees of comparison :
The Positive degree which denotes simply that the person or thing
denoted by the noun which the adjective qualifies possesses the quality
expressed by the adjective.
6-2
84 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES
The Comparative degree which denotes that the person or thing
possesses this quality in a higher degree than some other person or
thing.
The Superlative degree which denotes that the person or thing
possesses this quality in the highest degree, or in a very high degree.
Examples :
Positive degree. He is a tall man.
Comparative degree. He is taller than his brother.
Superlative degree. He is the tallest man in the town.
The Comparative and Superlative degrees of comparison are ex-
pressed in Greek by adding repos and totos to the stem of adjectives of
the 2nd dec, and to the stem of those ending in tjs in the 3rd dec.
When the last vowel but one of the adjective is short the final o of
the stem is lengthened to <u.
Examples
:
Positive Comparative
SiKaws (SiKaiOTfpor, rj, ov)
la-xvpos la-xvpoTfpos, t], ov
iTo^os (TO(^a>Tepos, 77, ov
a\r)6r]S {oKrjBforTfpos, rj, ov)
The following adjectives form their degrees of comparison irregularly.
Superlative
(StKatdraroff, j;, ov)
{lirxyparaTos, ij, ov)
(o-o^mraToy, >;, ov)
(ahjdfOTaTOs, rj, ov)
Positive
dyaBos good
KOKos bad
TTokis manyp.LKp6s little
fieyas great
Comparative
KpfiaaatVy KpsLTTuv better
X^ipav, rjacrav, rJTTtav
worse
TrXfitav, nXeav more
psiKporepos, eXacrtro)!/, iKuTTav
Superlative
{uparuTTos) best
(xfiptoTos) worst
TrXfiaros most
(piKporaros), eXd;(«7-
Tos least
p.iyuTTos greatestfiei^tav greater
Adjectives in the Comparative degree ending in a>v are declined as
follows :
Masc. Fem. Neut.
N. fiei(av fiei^ov
A. pei^ova, /ift'fo) pel^ov
G. pfi^ovos ptl^ovos
D. p,eL^ovL pel^ovi
ADVERBS 85
Masc. Fern.
A. jiei^ovas, /ifi^ovs
G. fifc^ovav
D. nei^o(ri
Neut.
fiel^ova, fiei^a
An adjective or adverb in the comparative degree is followed either
by a noun or pronoun in the Genitive, or by ^ " than" followed by a nounor pronoun in the same case as the noun or pronoun with which the
adjective agrees.
. Examples : He is wiser than his son.
c7"0(^(»Tcpdff eartv tov vtov.
or a-o<pa>T€p6s iimv ij o vlos.
Adverbs
Adverbs are formed from adjectives by changing the v of the Gen.
pi. masc. to I.
Examples :
Adjective Adverb
(^CKos dear {'^iKas) dearly
a-o<f)6s wise ((ro(f>S>s) wisely
dXrjdfjs true aKrjdas truly
The comparative and superlative degrees of adverbs are formed bytaking the Neuter Singular of the comparative of the adjective to form
the comparative of the adverb, and the Neuter Plural of the superlative
of the adjective to form the superlative of the adverb.
Examples :
Positive Comparative(a-ocjiios) (<TO(j)aiTepov)
oKTjdms {dKr]6e<TTepov)
The following forms should be noted.
Positive Comparative
/SeXtioi/, KpelaiTov
better
KoXKiov better, morebeautifully
tj(r(rov, rJTTOv worse
fiSXKov morevXeiov, ifKiov more
ev well
Ka\S>s well, beautifully
kokSs badly{jiaKa)
TToKv much
Superlative
(<ro(^a)TaTa)
(dXrjdeaTaTa)
Superlative
{fiiXnarTa) best
(KaXXtoTo) best, mostbeautifully
(ijiKio-T-a) worstp,aKi<TTa most(jrXeioTa) most
The Comparative and Superlative degrees of adjectives and adverbs
86 EXERCISES
are not much used in the New Testament. • The Superlative degree is
scarcely used at all : its place is taken by the Comparative degree.
Example
:
Being the least of all seeds that are on the earth.
funp&rfpov hv iravTmv t5>v <rnepjia.T<ov rav c'jri Trjs yrjs.
Mk iv. 31.
The forms enclosed in brackets in the tables above are not found in
the New Testament.
Exercise 27
ALearn Vocabulary 21.
1. T^ 8e ejravpiov^, oSotnopovvTaiv eKfivav, Kal rtj iroXfi iyyi^ovTav,
dve^T) TlsTpos eirl to dafia^ irpotr^v^aadai, 2. ov;(t 17 ^v)(ri TrXetdv ecrrt
Tjjs Tpo<^rjs ; 3. Koiavve^ovXevcravTo dTTOKTelveiV Tov HavXov. 4. 6 p-el^tov
iv Vfuv yevitrSa as 6 Vfompot. 5. Kare\a/3oj/ro on avSpanoi aypafifiaTOi
Kal Idiarai^ eltrlv. 6. vvv yap eyyvrepov ea-Tiv r) o'arrjpia ffpMV rj ore
eivtfTTevfTapxv, 7. oKr^Qois o^tos 6 avSptairos vlos deov ^v. 8. Kal pi'^as
Ta dpyvpia els tov vaov dve^^iapyi&ev, Ktu dweKdoiv aTrrfy^aTO^. 9. 6 Se
fuxparcpos iv Tr[ PairiXeia rav evpavSiv p,et^wv ixvTov ccrrlv. 10. vvvl Se
fiivei TTLtTTis, iXiTLS) dyaTTTj • rti rpia raOra, fiei^av Si Tovratv rj dydinq.
11. ipxfTai 6 Ia-xyp6rrep6s p.ov oiriam pov. 12. pei^ova rovrtov oijfd,
13. Kat vvv Ti /ieXXets,' ^dnTia-ai, Kal dnoKova'ai rds ctpaprias aov, iwiKa-
\eardp,ev6s to Svopa tov Kvplov. 14. irdvTfs ol iraripes TjpSiv i^anTiaavTo
els TOV McouoTji' iv Trj vetfjeXr) Kal iv Trj BaKda'a'Tj.
B
1. oi 8e p^el^Qv ^Kpa^av Xeyovres Kupte, eXerja-ov r)pds. 2. trv Kvpie,
dvdSei^ov^ TOV avdpaiTrov bv e^eXi^at^ 3. tj ^atTiXiatya vdrov^ ifXBev ck t5>v
TrepaTtnv ' ttjs yrjS oKoCfrat Ti]v (To<piav ^oXopSivos, Kal Iboii nXelov SoXop,&vos
aSe. 4. ovSels ewi^dXXei enl^Xripa^ poKovs dyvd(j>ov^ inl IpaTm naXaia-
1 7T) Si iiraipior "And on the next day," iiraipiov is an adverb meaning"to-morrow," tj agrees with itp^pq. understood.
2 t6 3S/ia "the house top."* AypdnfiaToi. Kal ISiurai "unlettered and ignorant."* dTTTJ-yfaTO middle aorist from ii7rd7xw "I hang."^ Avadei^ov " show."* ij pacrtXuT(fa v6tov "the queen of the south."' ix Tuv trepkruiv " from the furthest parts."
? MpXvM^l', t6, "a thing put on, a patch."" fidKovs d^vd^oi; "of undressed cloth."
CONTRACTED VERBS IN aco AND Ota 87
atpei yap ro TrXrjpatijLa auTov^ aTro rov ip,arinv Koi ^eipov or-)^l(Tp.a yiveTat,
5. dp^rjv Xeyft) vply e0' oa'ov^ e7roLr}(TaT€ evt^ TOVTiav rav d8€\<jiS)v povTaveXap^iOTO)!', epot eTroirja-aTe, 6. koX yivcTai ra etrxoxa Tov dvOpairov CKeivov
^eipova rav irpaiTcov. 7. eya> yap elpt 6 ekd^ttTTOs ratv OTrocrToXcoi/.
8. el ovv ovde eKd)(^L(TTOv byvatrBe, ri wept Ttov Xotirajv pepipvare^;
9. Xeyo) vpXv pet^av iv yevvr)TQis^ yvvaiKoiv 'la>dvov oiidels efrriv 6 be
ptKpOTepos ev rfj ^atriXela tov Seov pei^atv avTov eariv. 10. TreiBap^elv
Set 6ea p^Wov 7j dvSpairots.
1. And when Solomon had prayed he departed out of the temple.
2. The younger of the sons would not work for' his father. 3. The
robbers hanged themselves, for those that pursued them were more
than they. 4 "We called upon the name of the Lord, for he is stronger
than all the kings of the earth. 5. He chose Simon whom he surnamed
Peter. 6. Behold, love is greater than faith. 7. Why then do ye
delay to go to Jerusalem, for behold a greater than Solomon is there 1
8. We ought to obey the king rather than the priest. 9. They say
that these days are worse than the days of our fathers, 10. Ye took
counsel together to slay the wisest of men. 11. He that is least shall
become the greatest. 12. But he cried out the more "Behold what
things I suffer at the hands of my enemies." 13. Truly I perceive
that there is a division among them. 14. We cannot do the least of
these things. 15. Inasmuch as* thou hast done this thou hast done
worse than all thy brethren. 16. But he answered them more wisely
than his father.
LESSON XXVIII
CONTRACTED VERBS ENDING IN a<o AND oo..
The rules for the contraction of the vowels in these verbs may be
stated as follows :
a followed by o or cB becomes a.
a followed by f or 77 becomes a.
1 tA irKiipiiipa airoxi " that which fills it up.""- i4 So-oi/ "inasmuch as." ^ hi dat. from eXs "one."> pepipvare "do ye take anxious thought," see the next lesson.
5 yevvriToh "the offspring."
8 ireiflopxe'" "to obey," followed by a Dative.
' uTT^p followed by a Genitive. * Sn.
88 CONTRACTED VERBS IN aa
i is generally written subscript, except occasionally in the Present
Infinitive Active.
followed by a long vowel becomes a.
o followed by a short vowel becomes ov.
o followed by any combination with t, whether subscript or not,
becomes o«, except in the pres. inf. act.
Present Indicative Active of n/ido) "I honour"
Present Ind.
Tifuo (Tiiida)
Ti/ias (rifidfis)
Tifi^ (nfidfi)
Ttfiafxev {rifidofiev)
Ttfiare (rt/idere)
TijiSnTi {rifidovtri)
Present Inf.
Tifiav {niideiv) or n/iav
Present Imper.
TLfia {rifiac)
n/idra {Tijiaira)
Tijiore (TtfidfTe)
Tifidraaav {TifiairtiXTav)
rifiaivTav (niiaovTau)
Pres. Participle
Tifiav, ato'a, ant
TijiavTos etc.
Imperfect Indicative Active
erifiav (fVi'/xaoi') eTifiSifJutv (infidoiifv)
eTifias (e'rifiaes) iTifiare (cVi/idere)
irijia (e'Tifiae) e'riiuov (fTifiaov)
Present Indicative Passive
Present Inf. Present Participle
TtfiatrSat TtfioifieuoS) rj, ov
Present Ind.
CONTRACTED VERBS IN Oft) 89
Present Indicative Active of (l>avep6to "I make manifest"
Present Imper.Present Ind.
(jiavepSi {<l>avep6a))
^avepois {(fiavepofts)
<j>avepoi (^avspdei)
<^av€povpcv {(jiavepoofiev)
(pavepQVTe {<l)av€p6ere)
<j)av(poii<Ti (<f)avep6ov(Ti)
Present Inf.
<f)avepovv {^avepoetv)
<j)avepov {(pavipoe)
(pavepovTia (KJiavepoeTOi)
(pavepovTi ((j)av€p6fTe)
tpav€povT<o<7av (^avepoeroxrav)
KfjavepovvTOiv (ipavepoourav)
Present Participle
(jiavcpatv, <j)avepova'a, (jiavepovv
cjiavcpovvros etc.
Imperfect Indicative Active
€<l)av€povv (e^avepoov) efjjavepovpev {4(pavep6opfv)
cffiavipovs {i<j)av4poes) e<l>avfpovTe (e<j)avep6eTc)
etpavepov {e^avepoe) e<f>ajf€pouv {^<pav€poov)
Present Ind.
<l)avepovpai
(j^avepoi
(fjavepovTat
(pavepovp^da
(pavepova-de
(jiavepovvTai
Present Indicative Passive
Present Imperat.
(fiavfpov
(pavepovo'Oa)
(pavfpovirdf
(pavepovadaya-av
(jiavipovaBcov
Present Inf.
(jjavepovtrdm
Present Participle
(pavepovtievos, rj^ ov
Imperfect Indicative Passive
€<j)av€povfirjv ecftavepovpeOa
etpavepov e<l>avepov(rO€
i(pavepovTO etjjavepovVTO
The verb fdo> has rj for a in the contracted forms.
Present Ind. f£ fS* fn, i&pev f^re ^Sxri.
Pres. Inf. f^v.
90 EXERCISES
The Future and Aorist of verbs in am and o<o are formed by lengthen-
ing the last vowel of the stem before adding the endings.
Present. Put. Act. Aor. Act. Fut. Mid.
nfida) TiyLTftna iniirjira Tifirjaofiai
<jiavep6a) (jiavepaKTco €<j)avepa}(ra <f>av€pa(rofiai
Fut. Pass. Aor. Mid. Aor. Pass.
Tiiuf6r]irojt,ai eTijir)crajiiqv iTip,rj6r)V
^avepioB-qiTOfiai f<j)avfp<ocrdpriv i<pavepa>6r)v
Exercise 28Learn Vocabulary 22.
1. iirwddvero irap' alrav nov 6 KpiiTTOs yevvarai. 2. 6e6s ovk i(mvtKpav oKKa ^atvTtav, navres yap avra fwo"tv. 3. ovtos 6 \6yos oil <\>avf~
povrai ffplv^ 4. eXeyov ttjv e^odov avTov fjv rffieWcv^ wXrjpoiJv ev
lepovtraXrjfi, 5. Si^fUi/ 'Iwavou, dyanas fie irXeov rovrav ; 6. <pojvrj
^oatvTOs ev rfj eprj^ua. 7. iv ttj avrri atpa rjyaXXtcavTo ol fiadrjTai. 8. o
yap Oebs TaTreivoi Toiis vyjrovvras eavTovs, Toiis 5e raireivovvTas eavTOvs
i-^oi. 9. T&Tf earavpovv triiv airra 8vo Xrja-Tds. 10. Ti pe ipmras nepi
Tov dyadov; 11, \4yei avTcd 6 ^lijtrovs Hopevov, 6 vlos trov f^. 12. o fie
6e6s f'iaa-e ndvra to. fBvrj irepirraTelv ev rais oSols avTav. 13. Alvea,
larai ire 'Irjaovs Xpurros. 14. ovk e'ia 'IijiroOf to Saifiovia \a\eXv,
1. The disciples were making manifest the things which they had
heard. 2. We did not permit them to crucify the slave. 3. The king
humbled those that were exalted. 4. They are inquiring if the servant
is healed. 5. Why do you allow them to live in our city ? 6. Do ye
desire to love the Lord your God, ye sons of men ? 7. The voice
said "Cry,",and he answered "What shall I cry?" 8. Now is fulfilled
the word of the prophet. 9. When Jesus was born in Bethlehem wise
men came to worship him asking where the king of the Jews must be
born. 10. God justifies the sons of men by faith and not by works.
11. And all men rejoiced greatly that the man that had the devil was
healed. 12. Rejoice greatly, for thy son liveth. 13. Humble your-
selves therefore under^ the mighty ^ hand of God, for he wiU exalt you
in due season. 14. I manifested thy name to this people and I will
manifest it to their children.
^ iJlieWev a past tense with a double augment from pMWu.2 " Under" ^tto followed by an Accusative.' " Mighty " KpoToiAs.
PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES 91
LESSON XXIX
THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES
The Perfect tense does not occur very frequently in the NewTestament. Its use denotes that the action of the verb is to be re-
garded as brought to its appropriate conclusion at the time of speaking
in such a way that its results still remain in action.
The Perfect has therefore as much to do with Present as with Past
time, since it describes the. present result of a past action.
The Pluperfect or Past Perfect is the past tense of the Perfect.
There is no exact equivalent to the Greek Perfect in.English; the
so-called English Perfect formed by the auxiliary verb "have" is the
nearest equivalent that can be given, but it will not always serve to
translate a Greek Perfect.
The conjugation of the Perfect and Pluperfect of \va is as follows
:
92 PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES
There is a Perfect Imperative, but it is very seldom used in the
New Testament. It is given in the complete table of verbs at the
end.
Note that the Perfect participle passive always has the accent on
the last syllable but one.
It will be noticed that in all moods of the Perfect tense and also in
the Pluperfect tense the first consonant of the verb followed by the
letter s is placed before the verb.
This is called Reduplication.
The Pluperfect has an augment in addition, although this is often
omitted in the New Testament.
Verbs beginning with a vowel, two consonants (except a mute and aliquid) or a double consonant,have no reduplication, but have an augmentinstead.
Verbs beginning with a rough mute (</>, x, 6) have the correspond-
ing smooth mute (tt, k, t) in the reduplication.
Examples
:
Present Perfect
AfiapTavto ^iMaprrjKa
(TTfWai eaToKxa
TrXrjpoa TreTrXrjpajKa
<l>i\4a wecpiKriKa
Beaofiai Tt6eap.ai
Note that the characteristic consonant of the Perfect active is k.
The Second, or Strong, Perfect
Some Perfects are formed by adding the endings direct to the stemwithout K, these are called Strong Prefects, or Second Perfects.
The following are examples :
Present
PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES .93
The verb Xa/ifiaKco and the stem ip (generally given under Xeya) begintheir Perfect tenses with el instead of a reduplication.
Present Perfect Active Perfect Passive
Xaii^dva eiXij^a etXij/i/int
Stem ip ftprjKa f'iprffiai.
Examples of the use of the Perfect fromthe New Testament
Perfect Indicative
Ye have filled Jerusalem with your teaching.
7re7rXj;pa)K07-€ riji/ 'ifpovaaKr/p, Ttjs 8i8a)(rjs vp.S>v.
Acts V. 28.
I have fought the good fight, I have finished my course, I have keptthe faith.
Tov KciKov aymva rjyavicrjuu, Tov Spofiov T€T4\fKa, rrjv nltrnv TeTr)prjKa.
2 Tim. iv. 7.
Pluperfect
For it had been founded on the rock.
TiBffiiKiaTO yap e'ni Trjv irerpav. Mt. vii. 25.
Participle
Having been filled with all knowledge.
Tre7rXr)pa>ii(voi Trno-i/r Trjs yvaxreios. Rom. XV. 14.
To all that love his appearing.
7ra(7i Tois rfyairrjuoai Trjv ini<f>av(iav airrov.
2 Tim. iv. 8.
Note that in all these examples stress is laid on the completeness
and permanence of the action described.
A good example of the exact meaning of the Perfect participle will
be found in sentence 9 in tlie following exercise.
This should be contrasted with the meaning of the Present participle
of the same verb which is used in sentence 10.
Another good example is found in sentence 14 where icrravpa/ievov
denotes a permanent quality—" one who has been crucified."
It is impossible to render this meaning exactly in English, as has
been said above- If the Aorist participle aravpadcis had been used in
94 EXERCISES
tBia sentence it would simply have denoted the historical fact that
Christ was crucified.
The tenses of the Greek Verb have now all been given. To repeat
the first person singular of the Indicative mood of each of these tenses
is called giving the parts of the verb. A list of the parts of the verbs
occurring most commonly in the New Testament is given at the end.
The student should now begin to learn those which are given at the
head of each exercise.
Exercise 29Learn Vocabulary 23.
Before doing this exercise the parts of the following Verbs should be
learnt: ^dXXo> (34), yivojiai. (41), cpxoiiat (68), Xafi^dvai (50), Xfyw (71),
opdio (72).
1. "EWrjvas elirfjyayeu els to lepoVf Koi KeKoiv(OK€v tov ayiov roirov,
2. tTTCD^bs Se Tis ovo/iaTi Ad^apos e/3t|3Xi;ro npos t6v irvXava^ auTov.
3. naiSia, ea-xdrr] &pa eariv, /cat xadajs TjKovtraTe on ca>Ti\puTT0S^ epxerai K.a\
vvv avTixpttTTOi TToXXot yeyovaaiv^ 4. Xeyft aiira 6 IrjtroiiSf "Ort eatpands
/te 7rf7ri<TT€VKas; pajidpioi oi pi) Ihovrei Koi 7ri(rrev(ravTes. 5. ore Si
yiyova avr)p,.KaTripyrjKa^ to tov vrjTriov*. 6. Km dne}\.6ov(ra fli tov oIkov
avTrjs eSpev to jrmSiov /Sf/SXij^e'vow eVi Tr)v kXIvjiv koi to Satpoviov e|eXi)-
\v66s. 7. TTfTrXrjpcDTai 6 Kaipos Kot ^yyiKev ij jiatriKela tov Btoi.
8. epxeTat Trpos avTOU Mapta rj KaTiovpevjj MaydaKrjvrjy d0 rjs daLpovia
ewTa e^fXijXuflei. 9. Koi iroXXa (rapara t&v Kcieoipripevav dyiav rfyip6r)<rav.
10. ol padrjToi avTOv vvktos iXBovTcs €K\€\jrav ai/roVy Tjpav KoipMpevav.
11. 'lovdaiovs ovdev TjSiKTjKa as Ka\ (TV koWlov eirtyiyvoitTKeis. 12. nnpair-
/lof v/ids oiiK et\Ti<j)€v el pj) dvBpiiirivos^. 13. d yap 6eos etpTjue tovto 8id
tTTopaTos ndvTtav t&v irpoCJjrjTtav, 14. fjpels 6e KrjptKrfropev UpLOTov
earavpajpevov.
1. The days of the kingdom of heaven have been fulfilled. 2. Hehas not injured thee nor thy friends. 3. We have seen and testified
that this is the prophet spoken of by Moses. 4. Then the young menwere astonished, for great fear had taken hold upon them. 5. The
' Tv\iiv, Qvos, 6 "a door."^ ivHxpKTTos, ov, 6 "Antichrist."' Kar^ipyriKa perf. from Karafiyiui "I bring to nought, I put away."* tA toO vtitIov "ohildiBh things."' dLvdpiiirivoi "proper to a man, such as a man can bear."
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 93
Lord hath spoken evil concorning thee. 6. They have defiled the house
of the Lord with dead bodies. 7. Thou must proclaim the things
which thou hast seen and heard. 8. The governor asks what the slaves
have done. 9. Ye have suffered many'things at the hands' of the Jews.
10. Then Pilate answered saying "What I have written, I have written."
11. But when I became king I walked in the ways of my fathers.
12. The poor and the blind are cast^ at the doors of the rich. 13.
Lord, in thee have we trusted. 14. They found that the devils had
gone out. 15. I have told you the words of the kingdom, but ye have
not believed me. 16. These that have kept the faith shall receive the
crown of life which the Lord promised to those that love him. 17. Theybeheld the temple filled with the glory of the Lord.
LESSON XXX
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
The forms of the Subjunctive Mood are as follows :
Pres. Sub. Act. 1st Aor. Sub. Act. 2nd Aor. Sub. Act.
\vai \va-Qj jSaXo)
Xvrjs \v(rris fiaKjis
Xvrj \v(rT] ^^^JtXvcofiev \va'<i>iJ,€v ^dXcofiev
\vrjTe XvtnjTe 0d\T)Te
\va)(Ti Xvaoxri jSaXcucri
It will be seen that the endings of the Subjunctive are the same in
all these tenses, but that in the 1st Aorist the letter o- is placed between
the ending and the stem, and in the 2nd Aorist the endings are added
to the verbal, and not to the present stem. The endings are the same
as those of the Present Indicative Active with the exception that the
vowels are lengthened and 4 is written subscript.
There is no Future Subjunctive.
Pres. Sub. Pass, or Mid. 1st Aor. Sub. Mid. 2nd Aor. Sub. Mid.
XviOfjLaL Xt$(r&}/iat /3aXeo/xac
XiJ,i; XixTTj iS"^!?
\vr)Tm XvoTirai ^d\r)Tai
Xvm/ieda XvnafieBa ^dKafitda
\vija-6e Xva-rja-dc ^akqaSe
Xvwirat XvfTonfTaL ^aKavrai
1 " At the hands " 5id foU. by Gen. ^ "Are cast," use the perfect pass.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
In these tenses the endings are the same as those of the Pres. Ind.
Pass, or Mid. with the exception that the vowels are lengthened.
l8t Aor. Sub. Pass. 2nd Aor. Sub. Pass.
\vda)
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 97
Either the Present or the Aorist Subjunctive may be used in these
clauses, the Present if a continuoup or repeated action is spoken of,
the Aorist if a single action is spoken of. The Aoriat is used more
frequently than the Present. There is no "sequence of tenses," as in
Latin, and, if the verb in the main clause is in a past tense, it does not
follow that the verb in the dependent clause must be in the Aorist
Subjunctive.
(2) The Subjunctive is used in all clauses introduced by a relative
pronoun which does not refer to a definite person or thing ; i.e. all
clauses in which the word "ever" may be introduced in English after
the relative pronoun.
In these clauses the word av or edv is placed after the relative
pronoun in Greek and the verb is in the Subjunctive.
Example :
Whoever believes on the name of the Lord shall be saved.
Off &v irKTTevo'Tj els to ovofia tov Kvpiov <ra>6r]a-€Tat.
Clauses introduced by orav (ote Sv) "whenever" and ottou Sv
"wherever" and referring to the future also have their verb in the
Subjunctive mood.
Examples :
Whenever ye depart go into the city.
orav direXOrjTe elirfp^eade els rqv iroXti/.
Wherever the Gospel is preached many will hear.
OTTOV hv TO evayyeXiOV Ki)pv(TfTr}Tai ttoWol aKowcovo"!.
Clauses introduced by ewj depending on a verb denoting future or
habitual action and referring to the futiu^e also have their verb in the
Subjunctive, generally with &v. Such clauses may also be introduced
by eojff ov or eajs otov without ap.
Examples :
There remain until ye depart thence.
f Kei fiivere ews &v i^i\6r)Te 'iKfXQev. Mk vi. 10.
And goeth after that which is lost, until he' find it.
Kai TTOpeveTai eVt ro dn-oXaiXos etas evpjj avTO. Lk. XV. 4.
Tell the vision to no man until the Son of Man is risen from the
dead.
priSevl eiirrjTe to Spapa eas oS 6 vios tov avBpairov e'k veKpwv iyepdrj.
Mt..xvii. 9.
98 THE SUBJUNCTIVE
(3) The Hortatory Subjunctive. The Subjunctive is used in
the 1st person plural when the speaker is exhorting others to join him
in the doing of an action.
Example : Beloved, let us love one another.
dyawriToi, dyaira/ifv dWrjKovs. 1 Jn IV. 7.
(4) The Deliberate Subjunctive. The Subjunctive is used in
deliberative questions, when a person asks himself or others what he is
to do.
Example
:
What shall we do ?
Ti iroajtmixtv ;Lk. iii. 10.
Note that the Subjunctive is always negatived with /x^.
Exercise 30Before doing this exercise learn the parts of Sya (1), aKovm (2),
bf)(oiJ,ai (8), dirotTTfWa (35), Kpivto (43), Ktjpvcraa (28).
Learn Vocabulary 24.
1. KoKas dQercire ttjv evToXrjv rov 6eov, iva rijv irapdhofriv vfiav
•njprjaTJiTe. 2. Sytufuv dWa^ov^ els ras i-)(opAvas KapoiToKeK^, Iva kcu
€K€i KTjpv^o). 3. 6s hv fv Tmv ToiovTav natditav de^rai enl T& ovofiari
pov, e/16 di)(eTai- Koi of &v epe de';(i;rai, ovk eiie de^^erai, dWa tov ajrooT«'-
Xavrd pc. 4. fiij Kplvtre Iva prj KpiBrJTe. 5. or yap &v dAj/ ttjv ^xV"avTov o'OKraL dnoXetTeL avrrjv. 6. Kal ravs 6<l>6aKpovs avrav inappva'av^f
pi) TTOT-f XbatTiv Tols 6<t>6dKpols. 7. e'aw dijO'DS* f»ri Tr/s y^r eorot
Scdcpevov iv Tols ovpavois. 8. Kvpioi, rl pe 8fl jroielv tva arada;
9. aiyrov dKoi(reiT0€ Kara vdvTa 0(ra &v XoX^ot; irpos vpds. 10. \iyapev
ipa^ Hoifiirapev rd Kaxd, Iva eK6^ rh dyaBd; 11. TravTorre yap tovs
iTTaxovs «x*''^ M*^' favTmv, Ka\ orav 6i\rjTi Svvao'Se avTols fv jroajirai.
12. (jtevye els Aiyvirrov koi XaBi^ exel eas dv eiiro) crot. 13. optola eoTiK tj
/Sao'tXcia tS>v oipavwv fu/i.ij' fjv Xa/3ov(ra yvvrj eveKpvsjrfv els dKevpov (rdra
Tpta^ etas ov e^vpatdij^ oKov.
1. The Pharisees disregarded the commandment of God that they
might keep their own tradition. 2. Whatever I say to you privately
that proclaim to all the people. 3. What shall we do then ' shall we
' iXKaxoS "elsewhere." ' ixof"^"'' Kup/nr&Keis "the next villages."' Kappiu "I olos-e." * 5i)ffi)S from Siia.
' a^o, then, in questions denoting surprise.' tffSi, imperative ind. sing, from eXvai "to be.''
' iipii, !)%, ii "leaven."' dXeipov adra rpia " three measures of meal."" fvpSa "I leaven."
OF CONTRACTED VERBS 99
continue in sin that grace may abound^ ? 4. Whenever ye see the
Gentiles in the Holy Place know that the end^ of the age draweth nigh.
5. "Wherever the Gospel is preached those that believe shall be saved.
6. Send away the children to the wilderness that the robbers may not
kill them. 7. God sent many prophets that they might teach this
people. 8. Let us eat and drink, for we must depart quickly. 9. Let
us go elsewhere that we may exhort the multitudes. 10. Wheneverwe will we can do good to the poor. 11. Remain in the house until I
call thee. 12. We have cut down all the trees that the enemy may not
eat the fruit. 13. I will not drink wine lest I cause my brother to
stumble. 14. I beseech thee to guard my sheep until I find that which
is lost. 15. Whosoever wishes to be greatest among you let him humblehimself as a little child. 16. Lord, reveal thy power to us that thy
name may be glorified. 17. Bring the garments to me that they maybe carried to the widows.
LESSON XXX[
SUBJUNCTIVE OF CONTEACTED VERBS AND OF «>'.
FURTHER USES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE
The Present Subjuncti\
100 FURTHER USES
The subjunctive of flfit is as follows :
Singular Plural
ij Shti
Further uses of the Subjunctive
The Subjunctive is used in all conditional clauses introduced by
edv "if" referring to the future.
Example :
If ye do not repent ye shall all perish in like manner.
eav fifj fieTavorjtnjTC, wdvTes aaavTos aTroXcicr^e. Lk. XUl. 5,
The Aoiist Subjunctive (not the Present) is used with fu) in
prohibitions.
Example: Do not get gold for your purses.
fjLTf KTTja-r]6€ ^pvtrov els ras ^covas vfi&v. Mt. X. 9.
The Present Imperative (not the Aorist) with /xi; may also be used
to express a prohibition.
The Present Imperative generally denotes a command to cease to
do an action already begun, in accordance with the principle that the
moods of the Present tense denote action in progress.
Example
:
And they all wept and lamented her. But he said to them " Donot continue to weep ; she is not dead, but sleepeth."
SKXatxtv 8e Trai/rep /cat eKoirrovTO avTTjv. 6 fie elnev Mfj KXaierc, ovk
antBavev aWa Ka6ev8ei. Lk. viii. 52.
The Aorist Subjunctive generally denotes a command not to begin
to do an action.
Example :
Whenever therefore thou doest alms, do not sound a trumpet before
thee.
OTav oSv Troifjs ek(riji,o(rivr}v ,/itj (raXTriVjf eiinpoirdfv crov.
Mt. vi. 2.
In Acts xviii. 9 we have an example of both ways of expressing a
prohibition in the same verse
:
Do not fear, but speak and hold not thy peace.
fir) ^o^ov, cii^a XaXei Koi fx^ (7Lai7rr](T7]s,
The double negative oi /iij is used with the Aorist Subjunctive and
OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE 101
occasionally with the Future Indicative in the sense of the FutureIndicative with ov, but with more emphasis.
Examples
:
Him that cometh to me I will in no wise cast out.
Tov cp\6fievov Trpos fiC ov iifj CKjSaXo) e^(o. Jn vi. 37.
If I must die with thee, I will not deny thee.
eav 8eTf jue avvairoOavelv froi, ov firj ae apvTjirofiai.
Mk xiv. 31.
Frequently however, especially in the Gospels, it is used simply as
a negative future without any special emphasis.
Exercise 31
Learn the parts of Trpdo-o-to (29), deXa (11), yiyvacrKa (55), ia-6ta> (69),
TTlVcO (49).
Learn Vocabulary 25.
1. KvpiCj eav diXrjs bvva<Tal pe Kadaplaai. 2. €(j}aivrfa-ev de llaOXof
pfydXji (fiaivfj Xeytov Mr/Sei' npa^Tji treavrio kokov, anavTes yap icrpev ivBabe.
3. iav pri 7r€pi(r<rev(Tjj vpoiv rj dtKatotrvvjj irXetov ratv ypappariav Koi
^apKTaicov, ov p^ fltTeXdrjre els ttjv ^atriKfiav rStv oiipauav, 4. prj oZv
pepipvT]tTr]Te eh rtjv aSpiov. 5. hs &v pfj Se^rjrai Tfjv ^airiXeiai' tov Beov
as waidlov, ov pf] eltreXdrj els avrrjv. 6. Xeyft) yap vpiv otl ov pr] <j>dy(6
avTo eas OTOV jrXrjptoBfj iv TJj /SacriXcia toC dcov. 7. edv ns fleXi; ro BiXifpa
aiiTOv Troteiv, yvwa-erai irepi rrjs didax^s iroTepov^ eK Oeov iarriv. 8. pi)
vopitrrjre oti rfkBov KoraKvaai rov vopov rj rovs Tvpo^rjras. 9. vpeis eare
TO okas Trjs yrjs' eav 8e to a\as pcopavdjjj ev tlvi dXtirBqa-erai ; 10. enrev 6e
6 Kvpios TIB TlavXco Mr) (j)o^ov, dXXa XaXei, xai pfj aianrr^irris. 11. iav
dyairare pe, Tas e'vToXds Tas epds Tr]pi]<TtTf. 12. a/i^v Xiya vphi oti,
eltriv Tives t&v Side ovt(ov oiTtves ov prj yevcrcavTat QavaTov eats &v tdaa-iv
TOV viov TOV dvdpmrrov 6p\6pevov ev Trj ^atrLXela avTov. 13. edv yap
dyavTjoriTe tovs ayairavTas vpas, Tiva purBov exeTe; 14. xal eTvoirjaev
SaSexa Lva iiaiv peT' ai/rov Kai iva dnoareXXri KrjpvaiTeai Kol exeiv e^oviriav
eK^dXXeiv TO Saipovta. 15. pf/ ovv XeyereTi (jidyaipev ; ij Ti iriapev ; rj Tl
Trepi^aXdipeSa
;
1. If ye do good to them that do good to you what reward have ye?
2. Do not bring Gentiles into the temple. .3. Let us not seek the
things of this age, but the things of the age that is to come^. 4. If ye
do these things ye shall be loved by my Father. 5. Do not continue
to receive the enemies of the Gospel. 6. I will in no wise allow thee
' vdrepov "whether." ^ Use pres. part. o( Ipxopai.
102 FUETHER USES
to eat bread in this place. 7. If we confess our sins he will have mercy
upon us. 8. They went to the priest that they might ask him about
the vision'. 9. And all the people were silent that they might hear the
messengers of Caesar. 10. If we love him we shall keep his command-
ments. 11. The slaves brought me bread and fish that I might taste
it 2. 12. Sin no longer, lest a worse thing come upon thee. 13. If
these men are wicked the Lord will destroy them and their city.
14. I will in no wise manifest myself to this generation. 15. Do not
carry wine to the slaves. 16. If the enemy draw near I will set the
soldiers in order. 17. How shall we buy Isread that these may eat ?
18. Let us love our parents that we may be loved by them.
LESSON XXXII
FURTHER USES OF THE INFINITIVE MOOD
The Infinitive mood, as has already been pointed out, is really a
verbal noun, and, as such, can be used as the subject or object of a
verb.
Its character as a noun can be emphasised by prefixing an article to
it : it then practically becomes a declinable neuter noun.
Its case is shown by the case of the article, for the infinitive itself
cannot have inflections.
The Infinitive preceded by an Article, or the Articular Infinitive, as
it is sometimes called, may have a subject, object or other limiting
words attached to it. These words generally come between the article
and the infinitive and form with it a phrase equivalent to a noun.
The Articular Infinitive is frequently used in connexion with a
Preposition. Phrases of this kind are generally best translated by an
Adverbial clause in English.
Examples : els or n-pos followed by the Accusative of the Articular
Infinitive expressing purpose.
And they shall deliver him to the Gentiles to mock and to scourge
and to crucify.
KoX TrapaSairovcrtv avTov Tois e$v€(rtv els to ep.7ral^ai Kal p.a(mySttTat Koi
<TTavpS>ornt. Mt. xx. 19.
I sent that I might know your faith.
ejreiiyjfa fls to yvS>vai Trjv jrioTiv VfiSiv. 1 Thess. iii. 5.
' Spa/ia -aros, t6. " Use genitive case.
OF THE INFINITIVE 103
But take heed that ye do not your righteousness before men inorder to be seen of them.
Trpoa-fXfTf Se tijj/ SiKauxrvvriv ifimv fir) Troielv ejnrpoa-dfv t&v avBpamMvnpbs TO deadrjvm airois. Matt. vi. 1.
ev followed by the Dative of the Articular Infinitive expressing theTIME DURING WHICH Something takes place.
And as he sowed, some fell by the way side.
KaL €V ra cnreipeLv avrbv o /iev en€<rev irapa ttjv 6b6v.
Lk. viii. 5.
And while men slept, his enemy came and sowed tares among thewheat.
ev oe Tco Kaoevdeiv tovs dvBpairovs ^Xdev aifTov 6 ey^Bpos Kal CTreaneipev
fifaxm dva pearov roC a-irov. Mt. xiii. 25.
7rp6 followed by the Genitive of the Articular Infinitive to betranslated by before.
For your Father knoweth the things of which ye have need before
ye ask him.
DtSev^ yap 6 Tlarrip vp^v Syv ^peiav €^€T€ npo tov vpds aiT^aat avrop-^
Mt. vi. 8.
fierd followed by the Accusative of the Articular Infinitive to betranslated by after.
But after I am raised up, I will go before you into Galilee.
dWa peTci TO eyepdqvat pe Trpod^ta vpds els tt/v TaKiXaiav.
Mk xiv. 28.
Sid followed by an Accusative of the Articular Infinitive to express
CAUSE.And because it had no root it withered away.
Koi Sea TO pri e)(€iv pl^av e^pdvSrj. Mk iv. 6.
The Infinitive in Object clauses after verbs
of saying or thinking
We have already seen that object clauses after verbs of saying or
thinking may be expressed by a clause introduced by Sti with a verb in
the Indicative mood. They may also be expressed by putting the verb
in the same tense of the Infinitive as that used by the original speaker
or thinker when he uttered the words, or framed the thoughts, which
are reported in these object clauses. The original speaker or thinker
used a verb in the Indicative, Subjunctive or Imperative mood to express
his words or thoughts : when these words or thoughts are turned into
an object clause the mood is altered but not the tense.
' See Exerciee 36.
104 THE INFINITIVE IN OBJECT,
The subject of the Infinitive is of course put into the Accusative
case, unless it denotes the same person as the subject of the verb of
saying or thinking.
This construction is called the "Accusative and Infinitive" con-
struction.
We have a similar construction in English, but it is seldom used.
We prefer to use the construction which corresponds with the on
construction in Greek and to introduce object clauses after verbs of
saying or thinking with the conjunction "that."
Examples of the Accusative and Infinitive construction in English.
"The priests pronounced the lepers to be clean.''
"We know them to be guilty."
"I perceive them to be making a mistake."
The Accusative and Infinitive construction does not occur frequently
in the New Testament after verbs of saying or thinking. It is not there-
fore thought necessary to tre^t the subject at length here. For further
information the student is referred to the author's Syntax of NewTestament Greek.
The following are examples of this construction from the NewTestament.
Ye say that I cast out devils by Beelzebub.
Xc'yere ev Bee^e^oiiX eK&dWetv fie ra Satfiovta.
Lk. xi. 18.
How do they say that Christ is the son of David?
ttSs Xfyouo-iv tov Xpia-rbv elvai AavelS uidi/; Lk. XX. 41.
The Sadducees who say that there is no resurrection.
ol ^addovKoioi ol \iyovTes firj eivai dvacrracrtv.
Mt. xxii. 23.
The Infinitive in Consecutive clauses
introduced by ware
The Infinitive is often used in Oonaeeutive clauses introduced by
Hare to express the result of the action of the main verb.
Example
:
And behold there arose a great tempest in the sea so that the boat
was covered by the waves.
KOI l8ov (Tfia-fio! fif'yas eyeVfTO ev TJj doKda-a-n, SorerA irXoioi/ KaXvjrTe(r-
dm iffi T&v KvfiaTav. Mt. viii. 24.
CONSECUTIVE AND TEMPORAL CLAUSES 105
The Infinitive in Temporal clauses introducedby irpiv or irpiv V, "Before."
When the verb in the principal clause is affirmative the clause
introduced by irpiv has the Accusative and Infinitive construction.
Example
:
Before the cock crow thou shalt deny me thrice.
irpXv oKcKTopa (l>covrj(rai rpXs airapvrja-T) p,e. Mt. xxvi. 34.
Exercise 32
Learn the parts of tx'^ (70), Ka\ea) (19), airo6vj)<TKa> (53), jSaiVco (48),
TtUTTeva (14), ayairaa (15).
Learn Vocabulary 26.
1. TO ayairqv tov deov e^ oXrjs KapBias Kal to dyaTrqv Tov TrXrjiriov ois
eavTov neptacrorepov irrri navTav t&v oKoKavrcopaTcav'- Koi 6vtnS)v.
2. npotTeixpv 5e ol o^^Xot Tols Xeyofievots virb tov ^iXliTTrov iv Ta OKOveiv
avToi/s Kol jSXcVetv Ta (TTjpeLa a f Trotet. 3. irpb yap tov eXdetv Tivas ottq
^laKta^ov peTa twv i6vS)V (rvvr)aOtev 6 IlcVpoff. 4. Kal Sta t6 ir\r]dvv0^vai
TTjv dvop.lav yl/vy7j(reTai^ j) dyairrj Tav iroWatv. o, peTa Se to (riyrja'ai
avToiis aTTCKptSri 'laxcu/Sos. 6. TiVn \eyovcTiv oi avBpoTroi eivai tov uiov
TOV avBpmnov; 7. ovK otfjeiKopfv vopi^eiv \pv(Ta rj dpyvpa r) Xi'doj to
Oetov^ elvai, opocov. 8. Kal XiddtravTes tov HavXov ftrvpov e^(o ttjs TroXeoJS,
vopi^ovTes avTov TfBvrjKevai^. 9. eav de iiTrtap^v 'E^ dvdpoiirav^ 6 \abs
anas KaTaKidd(rei r/pas, maTevei yap 'ladvj)v wpo^rfTtv eivai. 10. 6 pkv
ovv ^rfiTTOS dn€Kpi6ri TJjpeiaOai tov HaxiKov iv Kaitrapeiaj eavTov 8e peWeiv
iv Td)(€i^ eKTropevea'dai. 11. Kal i6ap^T)6r)(Tav aTravTes, wiTTe o'v^r/Tflv
avToiis XiyovTas Ti icni tovto ; 12. dpijv Xf'yo) (rot oti eV ravTr; Trj vvktI
nplv oKeKTopa (pavfja^ai Tpls dnapvr)(rri pe. 1.3. koX yvaarov iyivfTO irdiri
Tois KOTOtKovo-w 'lepovordKrjp, aa-Tf KXr/drjvai to ^'^piov eKcivo Ax^XSapd)^.
14. Kvpie, Kord^ridi irplv diroBavelv to jraMov pov. 15. ^peXKev eavTOv
dvaipeiv^ vopi(a>v eKTrf<l)fvyfvai tovs 8€(rpiovs.
1. For to fear the Lord and to walk in his ways is good for the sons
of men. 2. But while the elders were coming we remained in the
fields. 3. The young men did not enter the temple because the priest
' oKoKaiTbiiia, -otos, to' "a whole burnt offering."
2 ^iryiJiTETai, fut. pass, from ipixi^ "shall grow cold."
3 t6 Beiov "the divine Being."• reSrriKfvai perf. inf. act. from BvTfUKw " I die."
<• iv Tdx« "quickly." " avaLpeXv "to slay."
106 THE VERBS IN fll
was dead. 4. And after Paul had spoken Festus answered him,
5. Before the king saw the city he sent three messengers to its rulers.
6. But we aU feared, so that we hid among the trees. 7. All the
people believe that Moses wrote these things. 8. Depart from the
house before the publican comes. 9. But after the multitude gave
heed to the apostles they did many signs among them. 10. We think
that he benefited this people by teaching them to obey the king.
11. And he healed the blind man so that all men wondered. 12. The
young man died before the prophet came. 13. We believe that Peter
is an apostle. 14. They stoned Paul because he preached the Gospel
to them. 15. To love the Lord is better than gold or silver. 16. While
he was coming down from the mountain he commanded his disciples
to tell the vision to no man before they came to Jerusalem. 17. Andnow I have told you all these things before they come to pass. 18. All
the Jews cried out that Paul ought not to live any longer •. 19. But I
perceived that he was a wise and good man. 20. The peopfe gave heed
to John for they believed that he was a prophet.
LESSON XXXIII
THE VERBS IN ;i«, K8a>^i
Besides the verbs in at there are a few verbs of very frequent
occurrence which are called verbs in fu from the ending of the 1st sing,
of the Pres. Ind. Act.
These verbs have endings differing from those of the verbs in a> in
the Present and 2nd Aorist tenses. In the other tenses their endings
are practically the same as those of the verbs in o>.
It is especially important in the case of the verbs in /ii to rememberthe distinction laid down in Lesson XVII between the verbal stem from
which most of the tenses of the verb are formed and the present stem
from which the present tense is formed.
The verbal stems of the three principal verbs in fu are as follows
Present Meaning Stem
SiSiofii I give fio
riSriiu I place Se
'ia-rrjju I cause to stand ora
BiBto/jLi 107
It will be noticed that the present stem is a reduplicated andlengthened form of the verbal stem in all three cases. "o-Tij/ii standsfor a-i<m]fii, the rough breathing taking the place of the o-.
The Present and 2nd Aorist forms should be carefully learnt.
The other tenses can readily be formed from the verbal stem.
Prei
108 SiScofii
EXERCISES 109
Exercise 33
Learn the parts of SiSafu (62), TriVra (26).
Learn Vocabulary 27.
1. o oe Ir/crovs e8i8ov rbv aprov rots liadrjTois iva StSSxriv airov role
ox^ots. 2. 6 yap 6fbs blba<Ti to nvfvpa to dywv rols alTovaiv avTov.
3. finov ifuv iv iroia e^oviria ravTa woifts, ^ ri's firTiv 6 Sois aroi Trjv
e^ova-iav TavTr)v. 4. avoXisTe kcu aTrokvOrjcrea-Bf, Si'SoTe kw. dodri(rerai
Vjuv. 5. KOI but Ti OVK ebwKas fiov to apyvpiov in\ Tpdwe^av^ ; 6. iiiuv
heboTai yv&vai to jivirrripia Trjs ^atTiXelas. 7. airoSos fioi tl tl 6<j)e!Xeis.
8. 6 Sc OVK ij6f\fv, aWa aneKBaiv e^akcv avTov els (fivKoK^v cas anoSa to
o^eCKofifvov. 9. t^fo-Tiv fjfias Kaia-api :j>6pov^ Sovvat; Sa/iev fj pj] bmp^v;
10. ebodrj pot Tratra i^ovtria iv ovpavco Koi eVi y^s, 11. 6 naTrfp dyandt6v uioK, KOI jrdvTa SeSaxev iv ttj x^^p'^ ai/Tov. 12. paKaptov icrri pSXKovSovvai Tj \ap^dvfiv. 13. Tis fj o-ocfiia ij 8o6ei(Ta TOVTif ; 14. eiTre poi el
ToaovTOv TO ;^a)^toi/ aTridoode ; 15. TavTa irdvTa troi ttoarat iav Trta-iav
Trpoo^KwrjaTis poi. 16. naX orav ayacriv vpds napaSiSovTa, pfj Trpopeptpvare
TL \akr]aT]T€j aXX o iav doOjj vpiv iv iKeivrj ttj cSpa tovto XaXetre. 17. Koi
vvv (ipriKa iip'iv irpXv yevicrdai, Iva orav yfvrjTai TTia-TcitrriTe.
1. I give you power over unclean spirits to cast them out. 2. This
dog was given to me by my father. 3. We wish to give the gold to the
high-priests. 4. Do not give good things to the wicked. 5. The field
was being sold to the soldiers by the publicans. 6. They went about
giving garments to the lepers. 7. I will in no wise give that which is
thine to the Lord. 8. Thou gavest me water when I was thirsty 3.
9. Let us keep the commands which have been given to us. 10. Hewho gives bread to the hungry shall in no wise lose his reward.
11. We were giving the money to the servants that they might give it
to the widows. 12. The king has given us this city that we may live
in it, let us not betray it to his enemies. 13. Sell all that thou hast
and give to the poor. 14. If ye ask bread will your father give youa stone? 15. AVhatever we ask will be given to us. 16. Give and it
shall be given to you. 17. This money has been given to thee that thou
mayest buy the field. 18. Give us, Lord, thy grace that we mayworship thee in spirit and in truth. 19. What is the wisdom that is
given to this man ?
1 ^iri TpctTTefoc= " to the bank." ^ <j>6pos -ov, 6, "tribute."
110 THE VEKBS IN jJLl
THE
LESSON XXXIVVERBS IN /it, TlBriiu "I place"
TL0r]fJ,l
2nd Aorist Middle
111
Indio.
112 THE VERBS IN fil
10. Koi fit fjv &v7r6Kiv eliT4pxi<r6e koX 84x''>vTai vfias, itrOUreTa irapariSeneva
Vjiiv. 11. Km l&oij avbpes ^ipovres eVi KXtVijs avdpairov oy 7]v irapaXeXv-
fievoS] Km e^rjTOVv avTOV eitreveyKetv xat tfeivai avTou evtaTTtpv avTov.
12. KOI avTos aTreawdirdri dir' avrSiv axTft \l6ov ^oKr]v ', Koi 6e\s ra yovara
npooTiixero. 13. Kvpie Sia n oi Svvafiai itol aKokovBtiv &pTi^; Tr)V i\rv\r]v
fiov iwep (rov 6r)iTa>. 14. ecfiepov ras Ti/ias rav ^apiav xai eTidovv irapa
Toils TToSas tS)v aTrotrToKav. 15. KaSov^ ix Se^Uov fiov eas av 6S> toxis
e\6ptyvs (Tov viroirohiov * t5)v iroSav (rov,
1. We set beside them wine and water in cups. 2. We wished to
place the sick in the market-places. 3. And falling upon his knees he
prayed to the God of heaven. 4. How shall we place the paralytic
before his feet ? 5. They tried to place the books in the synagogue.
6. We will place the lamp under the measure. 7. Thou didst place
me in a good land. 8. Behold all these laid down their lives for the
brethren. 9. Do not place this writing upon the cross. 10. This is
the throne that was placed in the temple. 11. Place the body of the
prophet in the tomb of his fathers. 12. The sword is placed in the
hand of the king. 13. The apostles placed their hands upon us andblessed us. 14. I will come down that I may place my hands upon her,
and she shall live. 15. The lamps shall be placed in the house of the
elder. 16. The nets were placed by the side of the ship. 17. Thesick man was brought in on a bed and placed before him. 18. I amhe that placed my hands upon your head when you were a boy.
19. Ye shall in no wise eat that which is set before you. 20. Thebread was broken and set before them.
LESSON XXXV
THE VERBS IN /it, larrjp.t
The following points should be specially noticed in connexion withthis verb.
(1) This is one of the few verbs which has both a 1st and a 2ndAorist in use. These tenses always difiier in meaning in the case of this
verb.
' ibael \i0ov po\iiP "about a stone's oast."' dpTi "now, at this moment." ^ ^tiffou "sit down."* inroirbSiov -ov, t6, "a footstool."
larrifii U3
The Present, Imperfect, Future and 1st Aorist tenses of the
active voice of ta-n)ij,i are transitive and mean " I cause to stand " or" I place " etc.
The Perfect and Pluperfect are intransitive and are used in the
sense of the Present and Imperfect with the meaning of " I stand " etc.
The 2nd Aorist is also intransitive and means " I stood."
The Passive is used in the sense of " I am caused to stand," " I
am placed," hence simply " I stand."
Practically the only passive tense used in the N.T. is the 1st Aorist.
(2) In the tenses in which there is reduplication (the Present, and
the Perfect) the first er is omitted and a rough breathing put in its
place : Present torij/ii for ctioti/^i, Perfect corijita for o-t'ori/Ka.
The breathings should be watched with special care in the case of
this verb. There is a rough breathing on all the moods of the Present
and Perfect tenses, and a smooth breathing on the augmented tenses
of the 1st and 2nd Aorist.
The Present Middle and Passive is only given for completeness, and
need not be learnt at first.
Notice that in the 1st Aor. Act. the usual <r, and not k, is found.
114 tarrifu
EXERCISES 115
Exercise 35
Learn the parts of la-nnu (63), 7rd<rx<o (73), dyyeXXm (33), (jyaiva (38),
^alva (48).
Learn Vocabulary 29.
A1. TOTC TtapaKaii^avei aiirov 6 SidfioKos eis t^k &yiau iroKiv nal e(TTr)artv
aiiTov effi to irrepvyiov^ tov lepov, 2. ravra Se avrStv \a\ovvTiov avTOS
eoTT] ev fieaa aiirav. 3. e^Xe^av triiv avTots earaTa tov avdpairov tov
TedepaTrevfjievov. 4. el de 6 ^aravas tov ^aravdv eK^dWet, e<^' eavTov
€fiepl(rdi]' TTots ovv OTaOrjcreTat fi ^atriKeia aiiTov; 5. to vvv TrapayyeXXei 6
6fos TOif dv6panois wdvTas TravTaxov iieTavoelv, fca6' on earrjirev ^fiipav
iv § /ifXXfi Kplvfiv Tqv oiKovp.ivriv ev SiKmoo'VVti. 6. 6 iapuraios trraBeXs
TaiiTa irpos eavTov TrpoanjvxeTO. 7. 6 8e TeXdivrjs paKpodev^ earats ovk
^9e\ev ovde Toiis d(l>dd\p^vs eirdpai els Tov ovpavov. 8. 6 de ^Irjirovs'
iardOri ep.irpo(rdev tov f^yep^ovos. 9. Se\s be ra yovOTa expa^ev ^tavrj
peydkji Kvpie p-q arTTjo-rjs avTols Tavrqv tt/v apapriav. 10. ^era Tavra
dvearri '\ovbas 6 roXtXaiOf ev rals f/pepais Trjs OTToypa^^s^ Koi dTreoTTio'e
\aov OTrltrat avTov. 11. el Mcovtreas Koi t5>v TrpofprjTav oiiK dKOVOvaiv, ovd^
edv TLS eK veKp&v dvatTTjj TreitrBr^irovTai, 12. eitrev he ra dvhpi r<a ^pdve^ovTi Trfv x^lpa'^'E.yetpe kw. aTrf^i els to peaov • koi dvaa-Tas eorij,
B
1. avSpairefTis pe KareaTTjirev KpiTTiv rj pepKTTfjv* e<j)' ipds; 2. ovSelr
bvvaTat eXdelv irpos pe edv prf 6 TraTrjp 6 irepylras pe eXxucri; avTov, kol
dva(rTrjiT<o airov iv tjJ ear^dTji fjpepa. 3. rj prjTrip Kol oi dSeX<j)ol avTOv
eioT^Keto'av e^at ^rjTovvTes avTa XdKrjaat. 4. ol viroKptToi (^tXoOcrtv ev Tois
ovvayayoLS earatTes TrpotrevxecrOm, oir<os (fyavStatv tois dv6panois. 5. bovs
be avTTJ xV-po. dvearrjo'ev aur^i/. 6. to be Trvevpa prjToos^ Xeyei on ev
v(TTepois KOtpois aTroaTTjo'ovTai Tives Trjs TrlaTetas* 7. ttws Spoiao'topev Trjv
^amXeiav tov 6eov, ^ ev rlvi avTrp> jrapaPoXrj BSipev ; 8. d be Irjirovs
eirCXa^opevos waiblov eoTfjirev avTo nap' eavTa. 9. jropeveade koi (rradevTes
XaXe'iTe ev tSi Upa t^ Xam irdvTa Ta pr/poTa T^r fw^r TavTr/s. 10. kol
KOTo^aivovTiOV avTav eK tov opovs everelXaTO^ avToZs 6 Irja-ovs Xeyav
' TTTepiyiov -ov, t6, "pinnacle." ' paKpbBev "afar off."
s iwoypa^ -^s, !), "enrolment."* pspuTTys -ov, 6, "a divider." ' pj/rus "expressly."
* ivereOMTo, 3rd sing. Ist Aor. Mid. from ivT^XKu.
8—2
116 OTHER VERBS IN /it
MijSei/i etnrjTe to opafia etos o5 6 vios tov dvBpairov eK vcKpatv avacrTJj,
11. OLS KOI 7rape(mj(T€v iavTov ^avra fiera to iraQeiv avrov ev ttoAAois
TfKpjqp'iois. 12. Koi irpoaeKdav fj-^aro Trjs (Topov^, ol 8« ^a^rra^ovTes
eonjcrax. 13. (cm ivrtjaav paprvpas ^fvSfls Xiyovras 'O avOptonos ovtos
oi Traverai \dkS>v prjpara Kara tov tSttov tov &yiov. 14. ayayovres 8e
avTovs earrja'av ev rw avueSplco,
1. I will cause thee to stand before Caesar for my name's sake 2.
2. The righteous shall stand in the kingdom of their Father. 3. Paul
therefore stood before Festus. 4. The priests caused the publican to
stand in the midst of the marketplace. 5. But Peter stood up and
preached the word to the multitude. 6. He is not here, for he has
risen 3 from the dead. 7. Who appointed thee to be the ruler of this
people ? 8. Then we arose and departed from the city. 9. You madethe king to stand in the Holy Place. 10. In the last days manydeparted from the faith. 11. We stood without*, wishing to see the
prophet. 12. Stand on thy feet and take up thy bed. 13. We hope
to stand before the Lord in that day. 14. Then the spirit of the Lord
lifted me up and caused me to stand on the waters. 15. After these
things many robbers arose and led away much people after them.
16. If any man believes in me I will raise him up at the last day.
17. We commanded the soldiers to stand apart from the multitude.
18. How shall we stand in the day of his wrath* ? 19. And standing
up he cried with a loud voice, " Stand apart from these men, and makethem to stand beside the king." 20. Those that heard these things
stood still.
LESSON XXXVIOTHER VERBS IN ,xt, o.'8a
The verb ti//« occurs in the New Testament only in compounds, the
most common of which are
d<j)iripj, "I send away, I let go, I forgive."
fnivitfp,t "I understand."
The verbal stem of irjpi. is L The rough breathing passes to the
1 tropSs -ov, ii, "a bier."2 "for the sake of" (vexa followed by a Genitive.8 "has risen" 2 Aor. iylirTriiu.
* " without "?f(.i. » " wrath "(ipy^.^s,^.
alBa 117
reduplicating syllable i in the Present and Imperfect, and the stem
vowel is lengthened before the ending m as in rldrjint.
All parts of the verb have therefore a rough breathing.
The forms of dipirjfu given below are those which occur most
frequently in the New Testament. Some of them such as the 2nd sing,
and the 1st and 3rd pi. of the Pres. Ind. are formed as if from dcjyla or
d(^ca) : a tendency on the part of the verbs in in to assimilate their
endings to those of the verbs in m is very marked in the NewTestament.
Note that in the Imperfect the preposition and not the stem receives
the augment.
Prea. Ind. Act.
{a(j)Lr)fii,)
d0«r
d<j)UT€
d<l>tov<ri
3rd sing. Imperf. Ind. Act. ^(jiie
Pres. Inf. Act. a(j)ievai
3rd pi. Pres. Ind. Pa&s. . d(j)ifvTai or
d^eavrat
2nd Aor. Imperat. Act. 2nd sing, acjjes
2nd pi. a(j)fr€
2nd Aor. Sub. Act. d(j)S> etc.
2nd Aor. Part, dc^clr d(j>ei<ra d^iv
Future Active. d<j)ri<ra
Future Passive, dtjiedria-oiiai
1st Aor. Act. a^Ka1st Aor. Pass, dtfiidrjv
The forms of olba " I know" which are found in the New Testament
are as follows
:
oiSo is a Perfect whose Present «So) is not in use.
Perf. Ind. Pluperf. Imperat. Subj. Inf. Part.
olba
olbas
olSe
otBa/iev
oiSarc, UTTe
otSaa-i, "(ra(ri
jjdeifiev
vSfurau
lore
eiotim
ei'Sof
bivafjuu "I am able" and iniirraiiai "I know" are conjugated like the
Present Passive of torij/ij.
118 OTHER VERBS IN /it
Imperfect
riBvvdiiriv
rfdwatro
ijbvvaTo
rj^vdfieda
TiBvuacrBe
Infinitive
8ivaa'0ai
Participle
Svvdfuvos, t}, ov
Present
hvvafnu
hvvairai, hivrj
Bvvarai
Swd/teda
BvvaaSe
Bwavrai rjdvvavro
Notice that the Imperfect has a double augment. The Aorist
r)Bvvr)driv also generally has a double augment.
There is also another class of verbs in ju which inserts w (in stems
ending in a vowel vw) between the verbal stem and the endings of the
Present tense.
Stem Pres. Ind. Act.
BelKvvfu
oXXv/xe (SXvu/it)
oeiK
ax
Qavwiu
These verbs tend generally in the N.T. to assimilate themselves to
verbs in a. Such fu forms as do occur are similar to those of TiB^fu,
allowing for the stem vowel v instead of e.
Exercise 36
Learn the parts of d^lT)'fu, (49), Svvafuu (10), Sfixwui (60), ypd<pm (7).
Learn Vocabulary 30.
I. (cai vvv Xcyo) Vjuv diroaTrjTe anit t5>v dvOpairtev tovtcov rol a<f>(Te
aiiTovs. 2. 6 8e lijirovs eiirsv avrw *A<^6S apri^ gvt(o yap npeirov €<rTiv
fiiiiv nXrjp&frai natrav BiKouxrvvijv. Tore d<j>iria'tv avrov, 3. rdre trvvriKav
ol fiadrjral Srt wepX 'Iwdvov rov ^aTrriarov eiirev aiiTois. 4. tls dvvarai
a^iEvai dpapTias el fifj els, 6 6e6s; 5. oi 8e ev6ea>s d(j>evTes rd BUrvaTjKo\ov6i]<Tav aira. 6. xai a(jies ^fuv ra 6<pti\^fiaTa fifiSiv, i>s Kai ij/icis
dfjyrjKafiev Tois ofjteiKeTms fjjiaiv. 7. edv yap d<fi^Te toIs dvOpmnois rd
napaiTT&fuiTa avrStv, d<^r)(Tei. xai Vjiiv 6 narifp hjxSiv 6 ovpdvios. 8. olBd (re
Tis el, 6 dyios tov 6eov. 9. rdre BeUvvtriv aiirm 6 dta/3oXoc 7rd(ras rar
^asrCKelas tov Kdtrfiov. 10. 7r\avdcrde p,r) elBores rds ypatjids it^lSe txjv
Biva/iiv TOV 6eov. 11. e<eivois Be rois %^a> iv vapafioXais ra irdvTa yiyverai,
iva OKOvovTes aKovao-iv nal prj avviaxriv. 12. ddptrei t4kvov, u<jiievTai
aroi ai dp.apTlm. 13. t'i on i^rjTe'iTe jxe; ovk ^Bevre on ev toXs tov irarpos
fiov Bel elvai p.e; 14. jjBei Be xai 'lovBas 6 wapaBiBovs mirhv t6v tottov.
THE OPTATIVE MOOD 119
16. ndrep, evxapuTTa o-oi OTi riKov(ras fiav, iyi> 8e ^Siiv on navTore fuw
aKOvets. 16, ravraeypa^avfilv ivae'iBjjTe OTL ^mjv e^ere alaviov, 17. 6e\<a
8e vfias etBevai on iravros dvbpos rj Ke<j>cL\rj 6 Xpiaros etrn. 18. Km oi/K
^(juev ra Scu/iovia XaXciv on jjSeurav airov.
1. Master, we know that thou art true. 2. God will forgive all
our sins if we believe on' his name. 3. Then the priests understood
that he had spoken this parable against them. 4. But since they did
not know this, they arose and went to Jerusalem. 5. Did ye under-
stand all these things ? 6. I forgive thee all that debt. 7. I write
this to you that ye may know that ye are saved. 8. Let these men
alone that they may worship the God of their fathers. 9. How shall
I forgive thee for this ? 10. He suffered not the men who had been
healed to follow him. 11. Know well that the Lord will not allow
thee to err. 12. I am not able to understand this unless^ thou teach
me. 13. Who is able to know all his faults ? 14. They knew that
their soldiers were of good courage. 15. Know that all your faults
shall be forgiven.
LESSON XXXVII
THE OPTATIVE MOOD. PERIPHRASTIC TENSES
The Optative Mood
The Optative Mood is used very rarely in the New Testament.
Its forms are given in the table of verbs on pages 143—148.
It generally expresses a wish
:
Example :
boy, mayest thou become more fortunate than thy father.
S nal, yivoto Trarpof eiTv\c(rTfpos.
It is also used in dependent questions in the writings of St Luke
sometimes with the particle av.
Examples :
And they began to discuss among themselves which it should be of
them that should do this.
KQi avTo\ rjp$avT0 (rufi^reiv Trpbs iavroiis to tIs Spa elr) e| airav 6 tovto
p4\\<ov irpdiTiTeLU.Lk. xxii. 23.
1 '!on" eis.' "unless" ei /iV-
120 PERIPHRASTIC TENSES
And while Peter was doubting within himself what the vision should
be which he had seen, behold the men that had been sent by Cornelius...
stood before the door.
ojs Se iv eavra bajTTopei 6 Tlerpos ri &v etr) to Spafia b etdev, l8oi oi
avdpes oi aTretrraX/ieyot vtto tov Kopvrf\iov , , .eireo'TTja'av eVl tov 7rv\S>va.
Acts X. 17.
See the author's Syntax of N.T. Greek, paragraphs 131, 160, 161.
Periphrastic Tenses
In New Testament Greek tenses are sometimes formed, as in English,
of a part of the verb "to be" and a participle.
They are called " Periphrastic Tenses " because they are expressed
in a roundabout way iwepi.(j>pa^eiv).
The commonest Periphrastic Tenses are :
The Periphrastic Imperfect formed of the Imperfect of elvw, and the
Present participle
:
And Jesus was going before them.
Km rjv Ttpoayav avTovs 6 'l7)(roSs. Mk X. 32.
The Periphrastic Perfect formed of the Present of elvm and the
Perfect participle :
The people will stone us, for they are persuaded that John is a
prophet.
o \abs KOToKidatTei rjfids, neTreitrpJvos yap iarriv 'l<oavrpf TrpoKJirjTTjv
fluai. Lk. XX. 6.
The Periphrastic Pluperfect formed of the Imperfect of tivai andthe Perfect participle
:
And John was clothed with camel's hair.
Koi jjv 6 'ladpTis evSeSviuvos rpi^as Ka/t^\ov. Mk i. 6.
The Periphrastic Future formed of the Future of elvai and the
Present participle. This form of the tense has the force of a Futurecontinuous, with the sense of continuity emphasised.
From henceforth thou shalt catch men.
dwo TOV viv avBpanovs taji ^coypiov. Lk. v. 10.
Exercise 37Learn Vocabulary 31.
1. Ihov i] bovKi] Kvpiov yivoiTo fioi kotA to prjiid <tov. 2. Kni irdvTes
8te\oyi^ovTO ev Tois KapBlais airav wfpi tov 'icadvov, fii) noTe aiiTos fin 6
EXERCISES 121
XptOTOf. 3. ro apyvpiov irov triv <roi eit) els ctTrayKeiav. 4. aKoitras Sf
0)(Xov biairopevofiivov^ iwvvOdveTO rt av eirj tovto. 5. 6 de Beos Ttjs
virofiovrjs 8^ ^ viiiv to airo (jjpovfiv iv oKKrjKois. 6. Kai ndv to wXrjBos ^v
TOv Xaoi) TTpotrev^Ofifvov e^a> rfj &pa rod Bviud/jiaTos^. 7. Koi ^v oXj; f)
iroXii enia-vvrjyiievri irpos Trjv Ovpav. 8. 'ifpovcrdKrip. la-rai irarovp.ivri ino
rSiV idvSiV. 9. eirrjpaiTav 5e avrbv oi p-adr^rai avTov tls avrrj e'lrj rj irapa-
^o\r). 10. ov yap eanv iv yaivi(f* ireirpayjievov tovto. 11. koi rjirav ol
fioBTjTal Icadvov vrjartvovTss. 12. eiTrev be 6 XiavKos 'EcrTMff eTri tov
^rjiuiTos^ KaiVapds el/u oS pe Set Kpivetrdai. 13. ^v yap SMctkiov airovs
as e^ovaiau e^^av koi ovx i>s oi ypappareXs avTav. 14. koi irpoa^KoKea-d-
pevos eva tS>v nai&av invvBdveTO Ti &v eo) TavTa.
1. Then the blind man asked what this might be. 2. The disciples
of Jesus were eating and drinking. 3. This thing has been done
before many witnesses. 4. May it happen to us according to thy will.
5. Thou shalt be walking the way of righteousness. 6. The disciples
disputed who should be the greatest. 7. Mayest thou become more
blessed than thy father. 8. May all the workers of iniquity perish.
9. Then all the multitude was gathered together to the sea. 10. Wedesire to know what this saying may be. 11. May I become more like
to thee, Lord.
^ SiaTopeuo/i^ov "passing by." ^ Sifri from SlSuiu.' Svpla/ia, -aTos, t6, "incense." * ytavla -at, ^, "a, corner."' §rjiia -oTos, t6, "a judgement seat."
122
VOCABULARIES
VOCABULARIES 123
ayyeXos, ou
dde\<li6s, ov
avdpcoiroSf ov
apros, ov
SovKos, ov
Odvarof, ov
Seos, ov
Kai
Koa/ws, ov
KvpLos, ov
\a6s, ov
Xdyos, ov
Vocabulary 3
(angelos)
(adelphos)
vofios, ov
oKos, ov
cprjfios, ov
686s, ov
(anthropos)
(artos)
(doulos)
(thanatos)
(theos)
(kai)
(kosmos)
(kurios)
(laos)
(logos)
(nomos)
(oikos)
fern, (eremos)
fern, (hodos)
angel, or messenger, (same word.)
brother.
man. (anthropology.)
bread, plural "loaves."
slave.
death.
God. (theist, theology.)
and.
world, (cosmic.)
lord.
people, (laity.)
word, reason. (The termination
"logy" in such words as "theo-
logy" comes from this word.)
law. (The termination "nomy" in
such words as " astronomy" comes
from this word.)
house.
desert.
way.
maiden, virgin.napBivos, ov fem. (parthenos)
N.B. The ov is the termination of the Genitive case. It should be
learnt With the words thus
—
ayyeXos, dyye'Xou "an angel." It is useful
to learn nouns in this way because the termination of the Genitive
shows to which declension they belong. All the nouns given above are
masculine with the exception of the last three. For a further explana-
tion see the next exercise.
apyvpiov, ov
fitfiKlov, ov
Saifioviov, ov
SevSpov, ov
epyov, ov
evayyc\u>v, oi
Vocabulary 4
(argurion) silver, money.
(biblion) book. (Bible.)
(daimonion) devil, demon.^
(dendron) tree.
(ergon) work.
(euangelion) Gospel (evangelist, evangelical, the
ev in the Greek is transliterated
into "ev" in Latin).
L24<
VOCABULARIES 125
Vocabulary 6dWd but.
diro from, (followed by a Genitive case.)
^aTTTUTTTjs, ov baptlst. (same word.)
yap for. (never used as the first word in a sentence.)
yXSo-o-a, rjs tongue, language, (glossary.)
8e but,and. (neverusedastbeflrstwordinasentence.)
,8e(r7rdTi;s, ov master, (despot.)
So^a, rjs glory, (doxology.)
fU to, into, (followed by the Accusative case.)
«, e^ out of. (followed by the Gen. case; the second form
is used before a word beginning with a vowel.)
iv in, on. (followed by a Dative case.)
6d\a(T(ra, r/s sea, lake.
/laflijTTjf, ov disciple, (mathematics.)
veavias, ov yoimg man.
ov, oiiK, ovx not. (the last two forms used before a vowel.)
oSv therefore, then, (never used as the first word of
a sentence.)
npo for, before, (followed by a Genitive case.)
irpo(l>fiTtjs, ov prophet, (same word.)
a-iv together with, (followed by a Dative case.)
Vocabulary 7
good,
beloved,
holy.
. eternal, (aeonian.)
just.
last, (eschatology.)
difierent, or other, (hetero-doxy.)
one's own.
bad. (cacophony.)
faithful.
wicked, d wovr/pos the Evil One,
first, (protagonist.)
Note that alavios has only two endings. The masculine ending is
used with feminine as well as masculine nouns.
dya66s, t/, ov
dyamiTos, ij, ov
ayios, a, ov
alavios, ov
SUaios, a, ov
(axoTos, r/, ov
CTfpos, u, ov
i&ios, a, ov
KOKOS, 7], ov
nuTTos, 7), ov
novripos, a, ov
wpSrros, t), ov
126 VOCABULARIES
aya
*avayi,va>irKa
*a7roKTftJ/o»
avros, Tjf u
SlSdtTKlO
CKfivos, rj, o
'lovSaios, ov
'laavrfs
i£)jpu(T<r<o
Kpd^a
oStos, avrj], tovto
neiOa
TTC/Xn'tU
*w€pi7rarea)
'^(rvvdyai
vcdf, ov
Vocabulary 8
I drive, lead, or bring.
I read.
IkiU.
I release.
he, she, it, also himself etc. (see next exercise.)
I baptise.
I teach.
I glorify.
I cast out.
that, (see next exercise.)
Jesus.
a Jew.
John.
I preach, or proclaim.
I cry aloud.
this, (see next exercise.)
I persuade.
I send.
I walk about.
I drive together.
*i7rdy(B I depart.
<^epa> I bear, or carry.
ffalpia I rejoice.
The verbs marked * are compounded with prepositions, for the wayin which they are augmented see page 22.
Vocabiilary 9
dn-doToXof, ov an apostle.
Sid "through" of place or time, "by means of" whenfollowed by a Genitive, "on account of," "because
of" when followed by an Accusative.
dtddo'fcaXos, ov a teacher.
' 'Iijo-oOs is declined as follows : Nom. 'IijiroBs, Voo. 'IijffoB, Aoo. 'IijffoOi',
Gen. Itjo-oC, Dat. 'IijiroS. It often has the article before it : this article mustnot be translated in English.
VOCABULARIES 127
epyartjs, ov
fvBis
dpouos, ov
'lepotTokvfia, av\
'lepova-dKrui )
Kapnos, ov
KpiTtis, ov
XlyOTT/ff, ov
\l6os, ov
Xvco
juera
olKoSecrvorr]!, ov
ovpavoSj ov
d<j>6a\ii6s, ov
ox^os, ov
Trpeir^vTepos, ov
irpos
TeXfflvi/s, ov
TOTTOff, ov
viro
VTroKpirljs, ov
Xpovos, ov
a workman, a labourer.
immediately.
a throne, (same word.)
(Neuter PluralJerusalem.
|(incieolinable feminine noun.)
fruit.
a judge, (critic.)
a robber.
a stone, (lithography.)
I loose,
"together with," "in company with-" when followed
by a Genitive, "after" when followed by an
Accusative,
a householder,
heaven.
an eye. (ophthalmic.)
a crowd, or multitude,
an elder, (presbyter.)
" towards," "to" when followed by an Accusative,
a tax-gatherer, a publican,
a place, (topic.)
"by" when followed by a Genitive,
a hypocrite, (same word.)
time, (chronology, chronic.)
aypos, ov
dSiKLaj as
ifiaprcoKos, ov
*d7repxop'M
*dT70<pivopMi
anTOficu
dpviofuu
Sexopai
*hUpxoiuu,
fpyd^ofuu
Vocabulary 10
a field. (Latin "ager," hence agriculture.)
injustice, wickedness.
a sinner.
I go away, I depart.
I answer, (generally followed by a noun in the
Dative.)
I touch, (generally followed by a noun in the
Genitive.)
I deny.
I receive.
I go through, I go about.
I work.
128 VOCABULARIES
epxo/iai
VOCABULARIES 129
ircipd^a I tempt.
TTTifD^os, rj, OK poor.
Sa/idpeta, as Samaria.
<rv thou.
Tv<j)\6s, tj, ov blind.
vpeis you.
*v7raKoia I obey, (followed by a Dative of the personobeyed.)
wSe here.
adtK€Q>
*dvoLyo>
Spxa
^ BuzKovea
blUKOVOSy ov
e'Xfe'o)
€v8vai
eiXoyca
e^Bpos, a, ov
*KaTOiKea>
on
*irpo(l)riTtia
fro^osi rj, ov
Vocabulary 12
I injure.
I open.
I rule, (followed by a noun in the Genitive. TheMiddle Voice means "I begin," see Voo. 11.)
I serve, (followed by a Dative.)
a servant, a minister, (deacon.)
I pursue.
I have mercy on. (eleemosynary.)
I put on.
I bless, I praise, (eulogy.)
hated, as a noun "an enemy.''
I dwell in, I inhabit, (followed by an Accusative.)
because, (also "that," seepage 53.)
I prophesy.
dyopd^d)
*a9rd'yct)
*dnoKdKv7rTa>
^aoTa^a)
iyyi^a
^eKKonra
Vocabulary 13
I sanctify.
I buy.
I drive away.
I reveal, (apocalypse.)
I carry.
I draw near, generally followed by a noun in the
Dative.
I cut down.
1 Although not really compounded with a preposition this verb generallyhas the form SitikSvovv in the Imperfect.
N.
130 VOCABULARIES
eXjri'fiB
VOCABULARIES 131
a, as\
aSvvaTos, t), ov
A'yvjTTos, ov (fern.
aXpio
*a7rayye'XX(»
Svvaros, 17, ov
»»;
'TUpaSrjs, ov
KatpoSf ov
*KaTaKpiva)
kXiVtj, tjs
KopvrjKios, ov
Kafirj, rjs
Mapidp.
Mapla,
pA^iupa, as
oirioo)
0T€
TrdvTa
napa
•jrapaKvTLKOSj ov
TTOTrjpiov, ov
(Tireipa
aravpos, ov
OTpaTiaTtjs, ov
<l>atva)
^apio'atos, ov
KJiBeipio
(f)v\fi, r]S
Xnpa, as
Vocabulary 15
impossible.
) Egypt.
I take up, I take away.
I announce.
Bethlehem, (indeclinable.)
possible.
while, until.
Herod.
Joseph, (indeclinable.)
time, season.
I condemn.
a bed, a couch.
Cornelius.
a village.
Mary,(ii^declinable.)
a sword.
after, behind, (followed by a Genitive case.)
when.
I owe, I ought (when followed by an Infinitive).
all things.
when followed by an Ace. case "to the side of,''
"beside" (of places), when followed by a Genitive
case "from beside," "from" (of persons), whenfollowed by a Dat. case "near," "at the house
of" (of persons).
a paralytic.
a cup.
I sow.
a cross.
a soldier.
I manifest, I show.
a Pharisee.
I destroy.
a tribe.
a widow.
when, as.
132 VOCABULARIES
attov auavos, o
dXfKTmp oKeKTopos, 6
dfiTTcXav dfiTreXauos, 6
Spxav apxovTos, 6
dtrrrip diTTepos, 6
fl<av (Ikovos, fj
ijyf/xtoi' fiye/iovos, 6
6vpa, as, fj
\ap.rrds \afi7rdBos, fj
fiT/V lujvos, 6
vv/KJiios, ov, u
VV^ VVKTOS, ^
oSovs oSdiToy, 6
Trals waiSos, 6 or fj
nirpos, ov, (5
noiiiT}v Ttoifiivos, 6
(rakiTiyi a-akwiyyos, 6
<rdp^ aapKos, tj
moTTip iraynjpos, 6
rpels
<l>v\a^ (fyvKoKos, 6
xdpis X"P"'°'i V
^iTav ;(tT£i'or, 6
Vocabulary 16
an age.
a cock,
a vineyard,
a ruler, (monarchy.)
a star,
an image,
hope,
a leader,
a door,
a lamp,
a month,
a bridegroom,
night,
a tooth.
a child, a boy or girl, (pedagogue.)
Peter,
a shepherd,
a trumpet,
flesh,
a saviour,
three,
a guard.
I call, I make a noise, (of a cook) I crow
grace, favour.
a garment, especially an under garmen
or shirt.
Vocabulary 17
mp.a aifJuiTos, to
dvr]p dvSpos, 6
a<l>€<ns d^iaeas, tj
$anTurp,a ^anTio'iiaros, to
^avCKtvs ^aaikeas, 6
yivos yfvovs, to
yovu yovaros, to
ypdiifia ypd/iiiaTos, to
ypafijxareii ypap.p.aTi(os, 6
blood, (haemorrhage.)
a man, a husband.
remission, forgiveness.
baptism.
a king.
a race, a nation, a generation.
a knee.
a letter (of the alphabet).
a scribe.
VOCABULARIES 133
yvvii yvvaKos, fj
eras erovs, to
SfXrjfjui 6e\r]fiaTos, ro
6pi^ rpixos, fi
dvyarrip Bvyarpos, fj
lx6vs IxBvos, 6
Kvav KVVOS, 6
KtaKJjOSf 17, ov
IKTavoia, Of, T)
p.^Trjp prjTpos, i)
oSs cords, TO
waTrjp irarpos, 6
TTvevfia TTvev/jiaTOSj to
iroKis iroXeaSj fj
wovs 7ro86s, 6
irvp n'vposy to
Tepas TepaTos, to
vSap vSaros, to
<j)5)s (jxarros, to
Xfip X"P°h V
a woman, wife, (gynaecology.)
a year.
will.
a hair.
a daughter.
a fish.
a dog. (Cynic.)
dull, deaf, dumb.repentance.
a mother. (Latin " mater.")
an ear.
a father. (Latin "pater.")
spirit, wind, (pneumatic.)
a city, (politics.)
a foot, (chiropodist.)
a fire, (pyrotechny.)
a wonder, a miracle.
water, (hydraulic, hydropathy.)
light, (phosphorus.)
a hand, (chiropodist.)
Vocabulary 18
aXrjBfis, d\rid4s
dvatTTatns dvaaTd(rfas, ^
dpxupevs dpxtfpeos, 6
dadfvfjs, es
a^piui/, a<f>pov
yovfvs yovinK, 6
AaveiS, Aa/3/$, o
eBvoS ^dvQVS, TO
fl
els, fiia, ev
f , , ,
tepevs iepeas, 6
Kpljia KpifUlTOS, TO
Kpiaris Kpiircms, fj
lidWov
pxyas, /ifyoKri, fieya
true.
resurrection.
a high priest.
weak, sick.
foolish.
a father, an ancestor, in the pi. parents.
David, (indeclinable.)
a race, in the pi. the Gentiles.
if.
one.
than.
a priest.
a judgement, a sentence, a condemnation.
a judgement.
more.
great.
134 VOCABULARIES
litjSeis, HJjbeiila, fitjbfv
VfKpos, a, ov
ovofia ovoptaTos, to
opos opovs, TO
ovdels, oi/befila, oitbev
was, naira, irav
irioTis ir'urreais, rj
TToXuf, 7ro\X^, iroXt!
prilia pTjpaTOS, to
iTKoros tTKorovs, TO
o-JTf'p/ia trwepiioTos, to
UTOpa (TTOfiaTOS, TO
aafia (raparos, to
vyifjs vyiis
no one (with the Imperative, Infinitive
etc.).
no more.
dead, (necropolis.)
a name, (synonym.)
a hill, a mountain,
no one. (with the Indicative.)
all, every,
faith.
many, much, (polygon.)
a word, a saying,
darkness.
(hygienic.)
a mouth,
a body,
whole, healthy.
Vocabulary 19
aKadapTos, ov unclean.
*a/i^(^aXXo> I throw round, I throw on this side andthat, especially used of a net.
'Avavias, 6 Ananias.
'AvSpeas, ov, 6 Andrew.FaXtXaid, ay, fj Galilee.
*8ia(rrreip(a I scatter abroad, I disperse.
*fl(repxopai Fut. ela-cKeva-opm I go into, I enter.
*e^epXopM1 evaYy(\i(opai
'WXfias, 6
MavoTjS, eios, 6
*jrapayivopai
*napdyio
nfvTaKi(r)(i\ioi
TTCOS
SaTavas gen. Sarava, 6
Si/Acoi/ Sipavos, 6
I go out.
I preach the Gospel.
Elijah.
Moses.
I become near, I am present, I approach,
I go to.
I pass by. (lit. I lead past.)
five thousand,
how.
Satan.
Simon.
1 This is a compound word and is augmented like a verb oompoundedwith a preposition. 1 Aor. Mid. eiayyeKiaipriv.
VOCABULARIES 135
<r7r€ipa(r(rta
136 VOCABULARIES
ITVVd
TIS Ti
ris Tl
', ov, TO a council. (Sanhedrin.)
who? which? what?
a certain person, a certain thing.
Vocabulary 21
oKrjBas
VOCABULARIES 137
Vocabulary 22
dyaWida
138 VOCABULARIES
From this point verbs compounded with a preposition
are no longer marked.
VOCABULARIES 139
e^o)
140 VOCABULARIES
8f|toi, a, ov
VOCABULARIES 141
iravTa^ov
napio-nifu
naioiiai
reKfirjpioVj ou, to
va-repoSf a, ov
everywhere.
In the Transitive tenses "I cause to stand
beside," " I present."
I cease.
a certain proof,
last,
false.
aKoXovBia
d(j)iTffU
SflKVVfU
fv6eas
ev-)(apuTria>
daptreca
ojba
ovpdvios, a, ov
o^iiKeTTis, ov, 6
otjifiXrjpaf arof, to
TrdvTOTC
irapdirTatpOj aTOSj to
7r\avdop.ai
npinov
(Tvvir]iu
Tare
dXX^Xovr, as, a
aTtaXeia, as, fi
SiaKoyi^opai
hiairopivop,aL
eirepayrdto
cTncvvdya
vr)tjT€vai
naTia
Trpoa-KoKeaj
virop.ovr), rjs, f/
(fipoveto
Vocabulary 30
I follow, (followed by a Dative.)
I let go, I let alone, I allow, I forgive.
I show.
immediately.
I thank. (Eucharist.)
I am of good courage.
I know.
heavenly.
a debtor.
a debt.
always.
a fault, a transgression.
I err. (planet.)
fitting.
I understand.
then, (at that time.)
Vocabulary 31
one another. (Nominative not in use.)
destruction.
I discuss.
I make my way through.
I ask.
I gather together to.
I fast.
I trample on.
I call to, I summon.
patience.
I think.
TABLES OF VERBS
THE REGULAR VERB
As there is no single verb in Greek which is found in every tense,
it has been found necessary in the following table to give tenses from
several verbs in order to present it complete.
The tenses of the verb Xum are given as far as possible, and the
tenses which do not occur in that verb are supplied from the verbs
TrdiTxa, yiveirdai, (nreipeiv.
The names of the tenses given in brackets are those by which they
are commonly called in Greek grammars. They are however in manycases misleading {Short Syntax, sections 83, 84).
It is unfortunate that we are compelled by the uses of grammarians
to use the name "tense" in connection with the forms of the Greek
verb. It directs our attention too much to the time of the action of
the verb, whereas it was the state', rather than the time ', that was mostprominently before the mind of a Greek. The time of the action of
the verb is often left to be inferred from the context, and cannot be
certainly told from the form of the verb. This is almost invariably
the case with moods other than the Indicative, and is sometimes the
case in the Indicative mood itself.
To the Greek mind the forms to which we give the names " Present
"
and "Imperfect" denoted continuous or repeated action.
The forma to which we give the name "Perfect," or "Pluperfect"
denoted action complete at the time of speaking, the results of whichwere regarded as still existing.
The forms to which we give the name "Aorist" denoted a simple,
indefinite action, and were always used where no stress was laid on the
continuity, completion, or incompletion of the action denoted by the
verb.
The Future tense in Greek, as in EugUsh, refers to future timein all its moods, and is thus an exception to the principle that thetenses of the moods other than the Indicative do not denote time in
Greek.
' See pages 177, 178.
THE REGULAR VERB 143
Tenses denoting continuous or repeated action
Active Voice
(1) In Present time.(Freseut Indicative)
\va
"Kveis
"Kiel
Xiofiev
"Kvere
\vov(Ti
(2) In Past time.(Imperfect Indicative)
e\vov
eKvfs
eKve
iXvere
eXvov
(3) At a time denoted by the context;
(Present Imperative) (Present Subjuuetive) (Present Optative)
Xvere
\viT<o(rav or \vovTa>v
(Present Infinitive)
Xiieiv
Xu7/S
\vri
Xvoifiev
Xut/Tf
Xvao't
Xvoifu
\vois
Xvoi
Xvoififv
Xvoire
\voiev
(1) In Present time.
(Present Indicative)
Xuo/iai
XiJi; or Xuet
Xverai
Xud/icfla
Xveo-Bf
Xvovrai
(Present Participle)
\v0P, Xvovtra, \vov
\vovTos K.r.X. (see p. 72).
Middle and Passive Voice
(2) In Past time.
(Imperfect Indicative)
eXvofiTjv
c'Xuou
eXuero
eXvofieda
eXvovTO
(3) At a time determined by the context.
(Present Imperative) (Present Subjunctive) (Present Optative)
\vov
\v4it6(o
\vea-de
Xvea-BuTav or \veir6av
(Present Infinitive)
"KveirOai
Xiafiai
Xu.17
Xuijrat
XvafJteOa
XvrjaBc
Xiiavrai
Xvoifiriv
Xvoto
Xuotro
Xvoi/ieOa
XvoLtrde
XvOlVTO
(Present Participle)
Xvofievos, I), ov
144 THE REGULAR VERB
Tenses denoting action in Future time
THE REGULAR VERB 145
(2) At a time determined by the context.
(First Aorist Imperative)
Xv(TOV
\v(raT€
\v<rdTa>(Tav or \v<rdvTav
(First Aorist Subjunctive)
Xucro)
Xvarji
XuoTjTe
Xvo'OKrt
(First Aorist Optative),
Xitrmfu
\v<raLs or Xucetac
\va-aL or XvtreLe
Xvcraifiev
Xvcotre
Xvaaiev or Xutrefai/
(First Aorist Infinitive)
\v<Tai
(First Aorist Participle)
Xiaas, Xio'aa'a, XC(rav
XixravTos k.t.X. (see p. 73).
(Second Aorist
Imperative)
wd6e
TToBere
iradeTaaav or iradovTav
(Second Aorist
Subjunctive)
n-dSa
irdBrjs
ndSrj
irddafiev
TrdSrjre
Trddao'i
(Second Aorist
Optative)
Trddoifu
ndOois
irdSoi
ndOoifiev
irdBoiTc
TrdSouv
(Second Aorist Infinitive)
naSetv
(Second Aorist Participle)
Tra^coi/, 7raSov(ra, iraSov
irddovTos K.T.X. (see p. 72, as Xvav).
Middle Voice
(1) In past time.
(First Aorist Indicative)
iXvadfj-riv
eXvcra
iXviraTO
e\v(rdiifda
iKv<ra(r6f
eXvaavTo
(Second Aorist Indicative)
eyevofiTjv
eyevov
eyivsTO
eyevo/ieBa
cyiveade
iyevovrq
10
146 THE REGULAR VERB
(2) At a time determined by the context.
(First Aorist Imperative) (First Aorist Subjunctive) (First Aorist Optative)
Xvtrai
\vird(r6a>
\vcratr6e
Xvtrdo'&atrav or \v(rd(rOa)v
XviTa/jim
XvcrrjTcu,
XvaafieBa
\v(r<i>VTai
XviTOLO
XitroiTO
\v<raiiie6a
\virauT6e
\v<raivTO
(First Aorist Infinitive)
\va'a(r6at
(Second Aorist
Imperative)
yevov
yeve<T6a>
ycvecdc
ym>c<r9ttMrav or yevcirBcav
(First Aorist Participle)
Xvaafievos, r), ov
(Second Aorist
Subjunctive)
yivafitu
yevrj
(Second Aorist
Optative)
(Second Aorist Infinitive)
yeviaSai
y€VOLfl7)V
yevoLo
yevijTai ydvoiTO
yevafieffa ycvoifuda
yevriadc yevourdf
yevoatrai yevoivTo
(Second Aorist Participle)
yevofievos, 17, ov
Passive Voice
(1) In Past time.
(First Aorist Indicative) (Second Aorist Indicative)
eKvOr/p itrirapipi
ikvBijs c(nTaprjs
eKvari eandprj
eXvOTjfiev etrndprjfiev
e\v6t)Te itrirdprp'e
eXvorjaav €trirdpr](rav
(2) At a time determined by the context.
(First Aorist Imperative) (First Aorist Subjunctive) (First Aorist Optative)
XvBtiti \v6& \vdeLJiv
Xydrfrm \v6tjs XvBeirjS
XvBiyrf Xvdxi Xydeirj
\v6riratrav or \vB4vtwu \vd&p,ev XvBfiripev or XvdfXpev
XvO^Tt \vdeir)Te or XvdcTre
\v6S)(Ti XvOfiTjtrav or XvBeitv
THE REGULAR VERB 147
(First Aorist Infinitive) (First Aorist Participle)
148 THE REGULAR VERB
(3) At a time determined by
CLASSES OF VERBS 149
.9 *< _ «> -aa ° S 3 s g
1 & »> I. I. J- J-I- ^ a & 1-^
is |if3- a. s o fc
?.<S b b t:
a § o SS- «e ^ to Si S -fe
150 CLASSES OF VERBS
a S "O
.5 g js <s b .a o§«« S ffl '«§mSP'''IS'^;5a is3 £ <SJ a£g ^-JS^. ^ as
S J a ;, 2
.ss ;f^ . agisg. .?" I^g-
5 -e a
I « §- I S i. "I ° £°
I V ?: ?:
^ # I II I""
^^g
OS S a „ . ^ 5!
iy "IB i=? KS "to •«» 2 .La *»« « ** -S "B -to tl* *to »to ^ "to *«<
a ft -g .2
lit 4} Mi * t4 |i I ItiCiti ub "€« ra-a-Sv bt- ubiCi b u b -€ « <«
CO CS
3 S^I—
I
"<ib «Mb -e-K
a aS .3 .3 ,3 "a.
3 b S-6 ^1 ? a § g 3
N t igs J J
6-K -B"iS« bC Mb
CLASSES OF VERBS 151
•2.
s>
IBOs
a
f^ S
5 a ;
o ^Si 8""S fe „ .i
C 3 <a. b .«
.S -S ^
^ I i b & ,
> Cc4 a -3 S a.<a b K «
C3
s 0*3.
152 CLASSES OF VERBS
g-^^-i a § -i-i -s ^1 ..sis'!a ';: «<u :d 93
w „p. "^ -^ «j„ »-^ p- "^ .d
S 5 g S
taSgo o M«ao -*^a.
P^ §: a. 5: -^ B fe 3-^ d b^
a^s^l" a. ^gl^g* i I
1 ^ Si o -S
1 'J 1 ^
<Q.S *"= 0«-eT3aB- o SB
^ "si „ ,
I'll!} 'i ih! illi * W*» :S S3
o ^ M 34 a M^sa bi<-^,33 ~a3 ,3aa '£"ab|o3a«Sg C ga ^"S'O <5>'-3R
GLASSES OF VERBS 153
<s
a. ©HI Hmao sSS
-It Q. Q. -©. *
•e-
-^ .S
•J.-So
3-3-3- -5 8c3
1^
>
APPENDIX I
PREPOSITIONS
Prepositions are words joined with, and nearly always placed before,
nouns or pronouns so that the preposition with the noun or pronoun
forms a phrase equivalent to an adjective or adverb.
Examples : Phrase equivalent to an adjective^
—
The king of Britain.
"Of" is a preposition, and with the noun "Britain" it forms a phrase
equivalent to an adjective. Compare the expression "His Britannic
Majesty.''
Phrases equivalent to an adverb
—
He walked for six hours.
They sat by the sea.
The phrases "for six hours" and "by the sea" are equivalent to
adverbs, for they qualify the verbs "walked" and "sat."
In English all prepositions are followed by a noun or pronoun in
the accusative case, or "govern" an accusative case, as it is expressed
sometimes.
Prepositions were originally adverbs, and are so still when they are
compounded with verbs. Most of the local and other relations which
are now expressed in Greek by a preposition followed by the Accusative,
Genitive, or Dative case of a noun or pronoun were originally expressed
by the use of a suitable case of the noun or pronoun alone.
In the language from which Greek is derived there were cases which,
when standing by themselves, sufficed to denote local, temporal andother relations.
The accusative case denoted extension, or motion towards.
The ablative case denoted separation, or motion from.
The locative case denoted place where, or rest at.
The instrumental case denoted the means by which an action wasaccomplished, and it also had an idea of association.
In that form of the Greek language with which we are acquainted
PREPOSITIONS 155
we find the form which we call the Genitive case used to express themeaning of the Ablative case as well as its own proper meaning.
The form which we call the Dative case expresses the meanings of
the Locative and Instrumental cases as well as its own.
We are therefore justified in saying, as a practical rule, that the
Grenitive in Greek denotes motion from, and that the Dative denotes
rest at, and can also be used to express the instrument of an action,
although these are not the proper original meanings of these cases.
As we have already stated the Accusative denotes motion towards.
These cases called in the help of adverbs to make their meaning more
precise, and, when these adverbs had become fixed in this use by custom,
they were treated as a separate part of speech, and called Prepositions.
Prepositions do not properly speaking "govern" the cases of the
nouns which they precede. The case is really the governing element in
the expression : the preposition only serves to make clear the exact
sense in which it is used.
But as language developed the prepositions mastered the cases.
As the horse in the fable called in the man to help him against the
stag, and allowed him to get on his back, and then found that he him-
self had lost his liberty, so the cases called in the help of the prepositions,
and then found themselves weakened and finally destroyed.
In English, French, Italian, and to some extent in modern Greek the
cases have disappeared, wholly, or in part, and the prepositions do the
work which they once did. For example we say "of a man" where
the Greeks said avdpmnov and "to a man'' where the Greeks said
dvBpamto.
In the New Testament we can see this process going on. Prepositions
are used with the case of a noun where the case alone sufficed in
Classical Greek.
For example the simple Dative was used in Classical Greek to
express the instrument ; but in New Testament Greek ev with the
Dative is so used.
Example :
Kvpte, €L Trard^ofiev ev fia^atpa;
Lord, shall we strike with the sword? Lk. xxii. 49.
In estimating the meaning of a prepositional phrase (i.e. a preposition
followed by a noun) the proper course to adopt is first to consider the
force of the case of the noun and then to add to this the root meaning
of the preposition. The combination of the two ideas will generally
explain the meaning of the phrase.
156 PREPOSITIONS
If the proper force of the case is kept in view it will explain how
the same preposition can have such wholly different meanings with
different cases. The meaning of the case is really far more important
than the meaning of the preposition.
We may see the joint influence of the case of the noun and the root
meaning of the preposition best by considering some preposition that
is used with all three cases.
For example napd means "beside."
When it is used with the Accusative it denotes motion to beside or
motion alongside of.
When it is used with the Genitive it denotes motion from beside.
When it is used with the Dative it denotes rest beside and is
translated "near," or "with."
Examples
:
Accusative. irepnraT&v 8e irapa TrjV 6a\a(T<rav Ttjs TaKiKaias eidev
8vo dde\<l)ovs.
And walking along the side of the sea of Galilee he saw two brethren.
KOI epi^av airoiis irapa roiis woSas airov.
And they cast them at his feet.
Genitive. iyivero avBptoTros (iTTfOTaX/ifi'oj Trapa 6eov.
There came into being a man sent from God.
do^av Trapa dvBpairav ov Xafi^avta.
I receive not glory from men.
Dative. einXa^opevos TraiSlov eoTTjtrev avTo Trap* eavTa,
Taking a child he placed him near him.
KQi nap' aiiT^ ijifivav Trjv rjp,epav iK.eivJ)v.
And they remained with him that day.
Prepositions connected with one case only
The uses of the prepositions given in the following tables are those
which occur most frequently in New Testament Greek.
The use of Classical Greek is somewhat different.
The meaning printed in black type after each preposition may be
regarded as indicating the root meaning of the preposition ; it also
generally indicates the meaning of the preposition when compoimdedwith a verb etc. The student is advised to master these meaningsthoroughly by learning them by heart, and to pick up the derived
meanings in the course of his reading, remembering what has been
stated above as to the importance of the meaning of the case in decid-
ing the meaning of a prepositional phrase.
PREPOSITIONS 157
Prepositions connected with the Accusative only.
avd up. (Frequent in composition with verbs, but rare
before a noun.)
fis into.
Prepositions connected with the Genitive only.
avn over against, instead of, in return for.
QTro away from (from the exterior).
cK out of (from the interior).
irpo in front of, before of time or place.
Prepositions connected with the Dative only.
ev in of time or place.
a-iu together with.
J^otes on the above prepodtions
ava occurs in the English word analysis iivoKvais) a thorough
loosing or loosing up.
The likeness between the prepositions avrl, airo, ix, irpo, iv and the
Latin prepositions ante, ab, ex, pro, in is obvious.
They occur in such English words as "antipope'' a bishop set upover against, or as a rival to, the Pope, "antipathy" a feeling against a
person or thing, "abstraction" a, taking away, "expulsion" a driving
out, "propulsion"' a driving forward, "intrusion"' a thrusting in.
(riv is found in many English words such as "sympathy,"" "symphony"{avinraBiia, (rvnt^avla).
Prepositions connected with the Genitive and Accusative
bia through. With the Ace. on account of, owing to.
With the Gen. through, throughout, by means of.
Kwrd down. With Aco. down along, during, with regard to,
according to.
With Gen. down from, down upon, against.
fiera among. With Ace. after.
With Gen. with, among.
vepl around. With Ace. about, around, of place or time.
With Gen. about, concerning, on account of.
\nr4p over. With Ace. above, beyond.
With Gen. on behalf of, for the sake of, concerning,
in-d under. With Ace. under.
With Gen. under the influence of, hence "by" of
the Agent after Passive verbs.
158 PREPOSITIONS
Notes on the above prepositions
hta is found in such words as "dialect" a language spoken through
a district, " diagram " etc.
Kara is found in "catastrophe" which means a turning upside down.
Iiera is found in the word " metaphysics" that science which is above
or beyond the science of physics.
It is also found in the words "metaphor," "metamorphosis," but
there it has the sense of change, of transference from one state
to another, which it commonly has when compounded with
a verb etc. in Greek. "Metaphor" means the transference of
a word properly referring to one set of objects to another
set of objects. " Metamorphosis '' means a change of form.
irepi is found in such words as "perimeter" the length of a thing all
round, "peripatetic" a man who walks about.
imip is the same word as the Latin "super." It occurs in such
English words as "hypercritical," over critical.
Prepositions connected with the Accusative,
Genitive, and Dative
ivl upon. With Aco. upon (placed on), up to, as far as.
With Qen. on, in the presence of, in the time of.
With Dat. on, at, on account of, in addition to.
irapa beside. With Ace. to the side of, beside, beyond, contrary.
With Gen. from beside, from (of persons).
With Dat. near (generally of persons).
npos towards. With Ace. towards, up to, in reference to, with
regard to.
With Gen. from. (Very rare in N.T.)
With Dat. at, close to.
Notes on the above prepositions
fVj is found in the words "epitaph" an inscription on a tomb,
"epigram" a writing on a given subject.
irapa is found in the word " parable" the placing of one thing beside
another for comparison.
Prepositions compounded with verbs etc.
In English certain words which are generally classed as prepositions
are joined with verbs and nouns to form compound words.
Examples
:
undertake, overtake, outbid,
overcoat, outrigger.
PREPOSITIONS 159
But very frequently these "prepositions" are written after the wordwith which they go, and separately from it. In this case it is plain
that these so-called "prepositions" are really adverbs.
Examples: They went away.
We took over the business.
This coat is quite worn out.
In Greek the "prepositions" are generally joined to the words which
they qualify, and form compound words.
I send away, aTrotrreXXo).
I drive together, or gather together, avvaya.
A synagogue (a gathering together), trvvayayrj.
An assembly (a body of men called out), ekkXtjo-io.
Chosen out, ekXektos.
In some cases two " prepositions" may be joined to one word
:
avTiTrapipxpfiai I pass by opposite to.
Consider the force of the "prepositions" in the following com-
pound words:
I go up.
I go away.
I go through.
I go into.
I go out of.
I come upon.
I go by the side of.
I go towards (especially of going towards people).
I go with.
I go in.
I go down.
I,go before.
I speak against, I contradict.
I have over, I excel.
I remain under, I endure.
avep^Ofiai
dnepxpiuu
SiepXOiim
el(T4p-xpp.aL
e^cpxa/iai
iiTip)(op.ai
napipxofxai
Trpocrfpxop.ai
(TVv€pxop.ai
KaTa^alva
irpo^alvd)
diTtXeyw
V7r€pex<0
Notice also
:
aTTOKaXuTrro}
€irifTTp4^<a
€7riKa\4ofiai
wpoaKoKfOfUu
wpoirKVvea
Trpocrev^o/iai
I cover away from, I uncover, I reveal.
I turn towards, I turn again, I return, I repent.
I call upon, I surname.
I call to myself, I summon.
I kiss my hand to, I worship.
I pray to.
160 PREPOSITIONS
In all these examples of compound words the "prepositions" have
the same meanings which they have when they are used before the case
of a noun or pronoun.
Certain of them however have a somewhat extended or different
meaning when they are used to form compound words.
For example dvd in composition means not only "up" but also "over
again," "anew" (the Latin "re") and also "back," and "to and fro."
ava/SXeVo) means not only "I look up" but also "I look anew," or
"I receive my sight.''
dvajTin-To) means "I fall back," or "I recline."
lifTa in composition generally has the sense of change or alteration.
jicTa^aiva I pass from one place to another, I remove, I depart.
fieravoim I change my mind, I repent.
fierdvoLa repentance.
irapd from its meaning of "beside" or "along" gets a further sense of
passing on one side and so of averting, neglecting,
transgressing.
vapepxofiai I pass by the side of, I pass from the side of, I pass
away.
wapaffaiva I go by the side of, I violate, I transgress.
napaiTeopm I avert by entreaty, I beg off, I refuse, I excuse myself.
irapaKoim I hear amiss, I disobey.
vno from its meaning "under" gets the sense of subjection or in-
feriority.
vnaKoia I list«n to, I obey, I submit to.
viraKor) obedience.
vnorda-a-ofioi I order myself under, I submit to.
Certain "prepositions" such as djrd, Sid, Kord, o-w sometimespractically lose their local meaning in composition and denote that the
action of the verb with which they are connected is to be regarded
as fully accomplished.
Some such compound words are :
dnoKTeiva)
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 161
The following compound verbs which differ greatly in meaning fromthe simple verbs from which they are formed should be carefully
learnt.
dvayivatrKto I read.
ajTOKpivoum I answer (I give a decision from myself).
eirayyeXKofiai I promise (I announce concerning myself).
jrapayyeWa I command (I pass a message along a line).
napaKoXia I caU to my side, I summon, I admonish, I exhort, I
entreat, I comfort, I encourage.
virayco I withdraw myself, I depart. (I drive or draw under.)
vwapx^i- He is (he begins below, he commences).
Notice also the derived nouns inayyekia a promise, irapayyeXia a
command, 6 TlapdKXrjTos the Advocate, or the Comforter.
APPENDIX II
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES
Conditional Sentences are sentences which contain a subordinate
clause which states a supposition and a principal clause which states
the result of the fulfilment of this supposition.
The subordinate clause is called the protasis, and the principal
clause is called the apodosis.
Example : If you do this you will become rich.
Here "If you do this" is the Protasis, and "you will become rich"
is the Apodosis.
The Protasis is introduced by ei "if."
The particle ilv is regularly joined to el in the Protasis when the
verb in the Protasis is in the Subjunctive mood: ci combined with liv
forras idv, ^v, av.
The negative of the Protasis is p.fi and that of the Apodosis is oi.
In the New Testament, however, oi is sometimes found in a Protasis,
especially when the verb is in the Indicative mood.
The construction of Conditional sentences varies according as the
time of the supposition is Past, Present, or Future.
Future suppositions and one class of Present and Past suppositions
have already been treated of, and will cause no difficulty.
N. 11
162 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES
Examples : Supposition in Present or Past time implying nothing
as to the fulfilment of the condition. The Indicative mood is used in
the Protasis just as in English ; any part of the finite verb may stand
in the Apodosis.
If thou art the son of God, command this stone...
el vl6s €L Tov Oeov, elire ra \W(^ TOVTt^... Lk. iv. 3.
For if Abraham was justified by works, he hath whereof to glory,
ei yap 'A^paa/i, i^ epyav ibKamOr], ep^ei Kav)(riiia. Bom. iv. 2.
Supposition in Future time. Either el with the Future Indicative
in the Protasis and the Future Indicative or some other form expressing
future time in the Apodosis, or eav with the Subjunctive in the Protasis
and the Future or some form expressing future time in the Apodosis.
The latter form is the more common. Note that in English we seldom
use the Future in the Protasis of such sentences as these, but the
Present, which has acquired a certain future sense.
If we deny him, he will deny us.
el dpvrjirofieda, KOKelvos dpvrjaeTat fjfjids. 2 Tim. ii, 12,
If all shall be offended in thee, I never will be offended.
el Trdvres (rKavhdKur6r]<rovTai ev (rot, eya ovSeTrore trKavSoKurBriaoiuu.
Mt. xxvi. 33.
If thou wilt thou canst make me clean.
edv 60^7]! hvvairai fie KaBaplfrai. Mk i. 40.
All this will I give thee, if thou wilt fall down and worship me.Tavrd aoi Trdvra doxro), edv Tretrav Trpoa-Kvvrjarjs fioi.
Mt. iv. 9.
If I must die with thee, I will never deny thee.
edv Serj fie avvairoBavelv iroi, oil firj <re dirapvrfO'Ofi.ai.
Mk xiv. 31.
It will be noticed that in all the sentences given above nothing is
implied as to the fulfilment or non-fulfilment of the condition stated in
the Protasis.
But in some conditional sentences it is distinctly implied that thecondition is not, or was not fulfilled-
Examples. Present time
:
If you were wise, you would not do this.
Past time
:
If you had been wise, you would not have done this.
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 163
In Greek such sentences as these have a construction which is so
different from that which is found in English that it demands special
attention.
The form which such sentences take in English is no guide
whatever to the way in which they should be translated into
Greek.
The rules given below must be carefully mastered and re-
membered.When the Protasis states a present or past supposition implying
that the condition is not or was not fulfilled, the secondary tenses
of the indicative are used both in the protasis and the apodosis.
The verb in the apodosis nearly always has the adverb av.
The Imperfect denotes continued action.
The Aorist simple fact.
The time of the action is implied in the context rather than
expressed by the tense of the verb^.
Examples. Present time :
This man, if he were a prophet, would know who and what the
woman is...
ovTOS fi rjv npo^rjTTjs, eyLvaxruev hv ris Koi TTOTOTr^ fj yvvrj...
Lk. vii. 39.
If thou knewest the gift of God, and who it is that speaketh with
thee, thou wouldst have asked him...
€1 fjSfis Trjv Sopeav tov 6eov, koi tIs iariv 6 Xiyav a-oi,...<rv &v i/TTjcrar
avTov... Jn iv. 10.
If ye believed Moses ye would beheve me.
El yap eirurTcvere Mojuo-ei, iiriaTCveTe &v ijioL Jn V, 46.
Past time : For if they had known, they would not have crucified
the Lord of Glory.
« yap eyvaa-av, oiic &v tov Kvpiov ri}! Sdfijs iaravpaxrav..1 Cor. ii. 8.
The following are further examples of suppositions contrary to fact
or unfulfilled conditional sentences taken from the New Testament.
1 (But as a rough rule it may be said that the Imperfect expresses an
unfulfilled condition in present time, and the Aorist expresses an unfulfilled
condition in past time.)
11—2
164 ACCENTUATION
1. 17 0a(ri\eia rj efirj ovk eariv ck tov Kotrfwv tovtov, el eic tov KOfrfigv
TOVTOv ?jv f] fiaiTiXfia fj ififj, oi vnjjpirai oi cfioi fjyavi^ovTo av tva jifi napahoBa
Tots 'JovSaiois, 2. €1 IjfieBa iv rais rjiiipus tS>v waripav r]p,S>v, ovk av ijp,e6a
KoivavoX iv T& atfian t&v n-poipryrav. 3. fl jffiei o oiKobeirnanis wola
<j)v\aKJJ 6 KXfimjs ep)(eTai, fypfiyoprjafv hv. 4. el rfyawari fie e\apr]Te hv
oTi iropfvopai vpos tov Trarepa. 5. el yap eyv&Keere tI eariv *EX€os deKa
KOI oil 6v(Tiav, ovk hv KarehiKOireTe tovs dvainovs. 6. ovai o'oi Xopa^eiv,
ovai croi Bri6<rai8dv, ori el iv Tvptf Kai Si8S>vi iyevovTO ai Svvdfieis ai yci/d-
ftevat iv v/uv, waKai &v iv O'aKKa xal o'lroda iieTev6i}<rav. 7. Kvpie, el ^s
&Se, OVK hv aireBavev 6 dSeXcjyos p.ov. 8. ft ifie jjSeiTe, Kal tov waripa pov
hv fjdeiTe. 9. el rii0\oi ^Te ovk hv ei)(eTe dpapriav. 10. el 6 deos warTjp
vpatv ^v, Tiyarrare hv ipe, eyat yap ck tov Beov i^rjXdov Ka\ ^K<a. 11. el eTt
avSpcDirois rjpeirKov, Xpurrov SoSXos ou<c hv fjprjv.
APPENDIX III
ACCENTUATION
There are three accents in Greek, the Acute accent ', the Grave
accent \ and the Circumflex accent *.
The Acute accent can stand on any of the last three syllables of a
word, the Circumflex accent can only stand on one of the last two
syllables of a word, the Grave accent can only stand on the last syllable
of a word.
A word with an Acute accent on the last syllable is said to be
oxytone or sharp toned, if the accent is on the last syllable but one
the word is said to be parozytone, if the accent is on the last syllable
but two the word is said to be proparoxytone.
A word with a Circumflex accent on the last syllable is said to be
perispomenon, if the accent is on the last syllable but one the word is
said to be properispomenon.
A word with a Grave accent on the last syllable is said to be
barjrtone or flat toned.
The last syllable but two cannot be accented unless the last syllable
is short.
If the last syllable but one contains a long vowel or a diphthong and
at the same time the last syllable is short, the last syllable but one is
ACCENTUATION OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES 165
accented with a circumflex accent, if it has an accent at all, except in a
few special words.
A word which has an acute accent on the last syllable changes this
to a grave accent unless it is the last word in a clause or sentence.
For purposes of accentuation final oi and at are reckoned as short
vowels except in the Optative mood.
Examples : avdpamoi, vfja-oi : but iroirjo-oi (Opt. Mood).
Accentuation of Nouns and Adjectives
The place of the accent on the Nominative singular must be learnt.
All other cases are accented on the same syllable as the Nom. sing, as
far as the length of the last syllable permits.
Examples : avdpiajros, dvdpanov,
npayfia, 7rpdyp.aTos, jrpayp.a.Tmv.
Exceptions. (1) The Gen. and Dat. of Oxytone nouns of the 1st
and 2nd declensions are circumflexed.
Examples : dpxhj ^PXV^: "PXTIj "PX"^"! "PX^'^'
6f6s, 6cov, 6ea, 0fS>v, 6eois.
SiKr), SikSiv.
(2) The Gen. pi. of all nouns of the 1st declension is circum-
flexed.
(3) Most monosyllables of the 3rd declension accent the last
syllable of the Gen. and Dat. in both numbers.
Example : SXs, &\6s, &\i, aKav, i\a-l.
Accent of Verbs
Verbs throw back their accent as far as the length of the last
syllable will permit.
Examples : Sov\eva>, SmiXevovai, 8oi\eve, eSou'Xfuoi/.
The accent of a verb compounded with a preposition can never
precede the augment.
Example : Trapelxov, not Trdpeixov.
For the accentuation of contracted verbs see pages 23, 24.
Exceptions. (1) Participles in inflection are accented as nouns.
Example : ^nvkevcov, neut. ^ov\evov, not /SouXfuoi/.
(2) The 1st Aor. Inf. Act., the 2nd Aor. Inf. Mid., Perf. Pass.
1 66 ENCLITICS
Inf. and Part, and Infinitives ending in vw, accent the last syllable but
one.
Examples : /SovXcfo-ai, yevi<r6ai, \eXvor6ai, XeXu/ievos,
laravai, hibovai, \eKvKivai.
(3) The 2nd Aor. Act. Part, and Participles of the 3rd declen-
sion, except the 1st Aor. Part. Act., are accented like Oxytone adjectives.
Examples : Xmayv, Xvdels, \f\vKac.
(4) The 2nd Aor. Inf. Act. ending in eiv and the 2nd sing. 2ndAor. Imperat. Mid. ending in ov have the circumflex accent on the last
syllable.
Examples : einelv, ytvm.
Enclitics
An Enclitic is a word which loses its own accent and is pronouncedas if it were part of the preceding word.
The Enclitics which principally occur in the N.T. are :
(1) The oblique cases of the Personal pronouns of the 1st and2nd person singular : /te, fiou, ^ot, crt, <rov, <roi.
(2) The Indefinite pronouns ns, n and the Indefinite adverbsTTorCj TTOVf iro)Sy etc.
(3) The Pres. Ind. of tl/u I am, except the 2nd person singular.
The word before an Enclitic does not change a final Acute accent
to a Grave accent.
If the last syllable of the preceding word is accented the accent of
the Enclitic is dropped.
Examples : (ro<l>6s ns, KaXdr eori.
If the preceding word has an Acute accent on the last syllable buttwo, or a Circumflex accent on the last syllable but one, it receives anAcute accent from the Enclitic on the last syllable as a second accent.
Examples : &vdpair6s ns, ovtos fori.
If the preceding word has an Acute accent on the last syllable butone, it receives no second accent. A monosyllabic Enclitic here dropsits accent, a dissyllabic Enclitic retains it.
Examples : Xoyos ru, Xdyot nves.
Parts of ei'/ii coming after oi retain their accent.
Example : ouk iarlv oStos ayaSbs avdpanos.
WORDS DIFFERING IN ACCENT OR BREATHING 167
Proclitics
A Proclitic is a word which has no accent.
The most important are the Articles 6, rj, oi, al, the prepositions eis , e k
fI, iv, and the words ti, as, oi.
Words differing in accent or breathing
aWd
APPENDIX IV
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
1. PARTS OF SPEECH
Bt parts of speech we mean the various classes under vfhioh all
words used in speaking and writing may be arranged.
The names of the parts of speech are as follows :
Noun. Pronoun. Adjective.
Verb. Adverb.
Preposition. Conjunction. Interjection.
The Article, definite and indefinite, is also sometimes classed as a
separate part of speech.
A Noun is the name of anything. (Latin nomen, name.^
Examples : John, boy, sweetness.
A Pronoun is a word used instead of a noun. (Latin pro, for
:
nomen, name.)
Examples : I, you, they, who, that.
An Adjective is a word joined to a noun to limit its application.
(Latin adjectvm,, a thing thrown to.)
Examples : Good, many.
A Verb is a word by means of which we can make a statement,
ask a question, or give a command about some person or
thing. (Latin varhum, a word, so called as being the principal
word in the sentence.)
Examples : I run, we see.
An Adverb is a word joined to a verb, adjective or other adverb
to qualify its meaning.
Examples : Slowly, very, there.
A Preposition is a word joined with, and generally placed before a
noun or its equivalent ', so that the preposition together with
the noun forms a phrase equivalent to an adverb or adjective.
(Latin praepositum, placed before.)
Examples : At, with, by.
A Conjunction is a word that joins together sentences, clauses or
words. (Latin conjicngo, 1 join.)
Examples : And, but, for.
1 See page 184.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 169
An Intekjection is a word thrown into a sentence to express a feeling
of the mind. (Latin interjicio, I throw in.)
Examples : Hallo, ha.
The Definite Article The and the Indefinite Article A are always
joined with nouns like adjectives.
2. PARSING
As this took is intended for older students it has not been thoughtnecessary to adopt the method of deriving the reason for the names of
the different parts of speech from examples.
This is excellently done in a little book called How to tell the Parts
of Speech, by the Rev. E. A. Abbott, published by Seeley, which the
student who is altogether unacquainted with this subject is advised
to get.
A few rules and examples are however given which may be ofassistance in determining the parts of speech.
The first principle to be remembered is that no word should everbe parsed without careful reference to the function which it performsin the sentence where it occurs.
In English many words having exactly the same form must beregarded as entirely different parts of speech, according to the place
which they occupy in the sentence, and must be translated by wholly
different words in Latin and Greek, according as their meaning varies.
For example the word that may be (1) A demonstrative Pronoun.
(2) A demonstrative Adjective. (3) A relative Pronoun. (4) A Con-
junction'.
(1) That is the man. (2) Give me that book. (3) This is the book
that I want. (4) He said that this was the book. (4) He came that
he might find the book.
Again, the word considering may be (1) A verbal noun. (2) Aparticiple.
(1) Considering is slow work. (2) He went away considering the
matter.
Many words may be nouns or verbs, according to the place which
they occupy in the sentence
> Con8i<1er tho meaning of the word that in the following sentence, Hesaid that that tliut that man said was false.
170 ENGLISH GRAMMAR
Some snch words are : Bite, fly, rose, scale and sign.
Other words may be adjectives or nouns, such as : Base, last, stout,
spring, kind.
Other words may be adjectives or verbs, such as: Lean, clean, blunt,
idle, free.
Keniembering then always to consider the word in connection withits sentence, the student should ask himself the following questions
before parsing a word. They will help him to find out what part of
speech it is.
(1) Is it the name of anything 1
Then it is a noun.
(2) Can a noun which is mentioned or thought of before be
substituted for the word without altering the meaning of the sentence ?
Then it is a pronoun.
(3) Does it answer any of the questions : What kind? HowmanylHow much! Which! Whose? In what order? with regard to somenoun 2
Then it is an adjective.
(4) Does it make a statement, ask a question, or give a command
'
Then it is a verb.
(5) Does it answer the questions How ? When ? Where ?
Then it is an adverb.
Note. The words How? When? and Where? are themselves
adverbs.
(6) Docs it stand before a noun or its equivalent making with it aphrase which is equivalent to an adverb or adjective ?
Then it is a preposition.
(Another test of a preposition is that it is a word which is not averb but which can stand before him and them, but not before he or
they.)
(7) Does it join sentences, clauses or words ?
Then it is a conjunction.
The words in the following sentence are parsed as an example.The man went guiokli/ down the street and did not turn to his righx hand-or to his left.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 171
THE
172 ENGLISH GRAMMAR
8. NOUNS
There are four kinds of nouns
;
(1) Proper Nouns. A Proper noun is the name appropriated
to any particular person, place or thing (Latin propriut, belonging
to a person).
Examples: John, Mary, London, England.
(2) Common Nouns. A Common noun is the name which all
things of the same kind have in common (Latin communis, belonging
to all).
Examples : Boy, girl, town, country.
(3) Collective Nouns. A Collective noun is the name of a
number of persons or things forming one body.
Examples : Committee, jury, army.
(4) Abstract Nouns. An Abstract noun is the name of some
quality, state, or action considered apart from the person or thing in
which it is embodied (Latin absiractus, withdrawn).
Examples: Goodness, whiteness, purity, servitude, running,
walking.
Number, Gender, Case
Number. Nouns are inflected or changed in form to show
whether they are singular or plural in number.
A noun in the Singular number is the name of a single person
or thing, unless it is a Colleotive noun (see above).
A noun in the Plural number is the name of more than one
person or thing.
Examples
:
Singular Plural
Horse horses
Man menOx oxen.
Gender. In English all names of men or male animals are in the
Masculine gender, all names of women or female animals are in
the Feminine gender, all names of things without life are in the
Neuter gender. Nouns used to denote pei-sons of either sex such as
parent, sovereign, are said to be of Common gender.
In Latin and Greek, although all names of men and male animals
are Masculine, and all names of women or female animals are Feminine,
names of things without life may be Masculine or Feminine in gender
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 173
ag well as Neuter. The gender of a noun is generally determined bythe ending of the Nominative Singular.
Case. Nearly all traces of case-endings have disappeared fromEnglish nouns. The only surviving ending is that of the Possessive
or Genitive case which is formed by adding 's to the end of a noun in
the singular and s' to the end of the noun in the Plural.
Example Nominative Possessive Singular Possessive Plural
horse horse's horses^
4. ADJECTIVES
In English, adjectives are never inflected, but have the same ending
whether they qualify singular or plural, masculine or feminine nouns.
In Latin and Greek they are inflected to show gender, number,
and case.
6. VERBS
Verbs are of two kinds—Transitive and Intransitive.
(a) Transitive Verbs. Transitive verbs are so called because
they denote an action which necessarily affects or passes over to
some person or thing other than the subject of the verb (Latin
iransire, to pass over).
Examples: I throw, I tahe. These statements are not complete;
we ask immediately. What do you throw or take? The name of
the person or thing affected by the action of the verb must be
supplied in order to make a complete sentence—/ throw a ball,
I take an apple. The name of the person or thing which is affected
by the action of the verb is called the direct object.
A transitive verb is one which must have a direct object expressed
in order to make a complete sentence.
Intransitive Verbs. Intransitive verbs are so called because they
denote an action which does not aftect or pass over to any person or
thing besides the subject of the verb.
Examples : I stand, The sun shines. These sentences are comi)lete
statements in themselves.
(5) Active Voice. A verb is said to be in the Active voice when
its subject is spoken of as acting or doing something (Latin ago, I act).
174 ENGLISH GRAMMAR
Passive Voice. A verb is said to be in the Passive voice whan
its subject is spoken of as suffering or being acted upon (Latin patior,
I suffer).
Examples : Active, I love, I was hearing.
Passive, I am loved, I was being heard.
N.B. Only Transitive verbs can have a Passive voice.
There are certain verbs such as I fall, I dip, etc. which do not
speak of the subject as acting ; these are however regarded as Active
verbs because they are Intransitive.
(fl) Deponent Verbs. In Latin and Greek there are manyverbs which are called Deponent verbs. These are verbs which havethe form of Passive verbs, but which are Active in meaning.
They are called Deponent because they have laid aside (Latin
depono) a passive sense and assumed an active.
Examples : patior, I suffer. airoKplvojuu, I answer.
{d) The English Passive voice of any verb is formed by using the
proper tenses of the verb to be with the Passive Participle (which
usually ends in ed) of the verb of which we desire to form the Passive
voice.
Present simple Active I love.
Present simple Passive I am loved.
Past simple Active I loved.
Past simple Passive I was loved.
Future simple Active I shall love.
Future simple Passive I shall be loved.
This formation must be carefully distinguished from the use of the
same Auxiliary verb to be with the Active PartxciMiB which formsthe Continuous Active tenses of the verb.
Present continuous Active I am loving.
Past continuous Active I was loving.
Future continuous Active I shall be loving.
The student should be able to tell readily what voice, tense, andperson any English verb is in ; unless he can do this he cannot possiblytranslate from another language with accuracy.
It is good practice to go through the tenses of an English verb, first
in the Active, and then in the Passive.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 175
(e) Auxiliary Verbs. Auxiliary verbs are verbs which are used
as aids (Latin ausnlia) to enable other verbs to form moods and tenses,
which cannot be expressed within the compass of one word.
Examples : I shall go. I would have gone. I shall have been
sent.
In English the use of these verbs is very common, no tense in the
Active Voice except the Past can be formed without them, and they are
used in every tense of the Passive voice.
In Latin and Greelc they are rarely used. The only verb used in
these languages as an auxiliary verb is the verb io he.
Impersonal Verbs. Impersonal verbs are verbs which are not
used in the first and second persons, but only in the third.
Examples : It rains, it snows.
The Copulative Verb, Verbs of Incomplete Predication.
The verb to he has two meanings :
(1) It is used in the sense of to exist as in the sentence Ood is.
(2) It is used to join together two nouns or noun equivalents which
denote the same person or thing when the person or thing denoted by
the one is said to be identical with the person or thing denoted by the
other.
Examples : William was Duke of Normandy. I am the governor.
This is he.
As the nouns or noun equivalents joined together by the verb to be
denote the same person or thing, they must always be in the same
case. It is grammatically incorrect to say / am him. It is me, because
Mm and me are in the Accusative case, and / and it are in the
Nominative case.
It is necessary to observe this rule very carefully in Latin and
Greek where the Nominative and Accusative cases generally have
different forms.
This rule is sometimes stated as follows
:
" The verb 'to be ' takes the same case after it as before it."
The verb to he may also join together a noun or a noun equivalent
and an adjective, making a sentence which asserts that the quality
176 ENGLISH GRAMMAR
denoted by the adjective is an attribute of the person or thing denoted
by the noun or noun equivalent. This adjective always agrees with
the noun in number, gender and case, in such languages as Latin
and Greek.
Examples : The king is proud. He is good. To err is human.
From its power of joining nouns to other nouns or adjectives the
verb to be is called the Copulative Verb. (Latin copulo, I link.)
It is also called a verb of Incomplete Predication because it does
not make sense when it stands by itself (except when used in the sense
of to exist), but requires to be followed by a noun or an ad|ective which
is called the Complement, becaiise it fills up the sense (Latin compleo,
Ifll up).
There are other verbs of Incomplete Predication besides the verb
to be, some Intransitive and some Transitive.
Such verbs are : Intransitive—become, seem, appear, etc.
Transitive—make, declare, choose, think, consider,
etc.
When a verb of Incomplete Predication is Intransitive, or Transitive
and in the Passive voice, the Complement refers to the same person or
thing as the subject of the sentence, and must therefore be in the
Nominative case.
Examples : Peter became an Apostle.
This place seems healthy.
He is called our king.
But when a verb of Incomplete Predication is Transitive and in the
Active voice, the Complement refers to the same person or thing as
the object of the sentence, and is therefore in the Accusative case.
Examples : They made him captain.
We choose you king.
You consider me happy.
This principle is obviously of great importance in Greek and Latin.
(/) Person and Number.
The First Person of the verb is used when the speaker is speaking
of himself.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 177
The Second Person is used when the speaker is speaking to
another person or thing.
The Third Person is used when the speaker is speaking of
another person or thing.
Examples : 1st person, I love. 2nd person, You. love. 3rd person,
He loves.
The use of the Singular Number denotes that only one person or
thing is being spoken about.
The use of the Plural Number denotes that more than one person
or thing is being spoken about.
Ride. The verb agrees with its subject in Number and Person.
Note. The Plural of the second person You is almost always used
in modern English instead of the second person Singular, even where
only one person is being spoken to.
But in Latin and Greek the Singular is always used when one
person is being spoken to.
{g) Tense. Tenses are forms which verbs assume to show at
what time the action of the verb is represented as taking place.
The times when the action may take place are (i) Past, (ii) Present,
(iii) Future.
The tenses in English have further subdivisions to show whether
the action is represented as being (1) continuous or in progress,
(2) indefinite or simple, (3) perfect or completed.
Below is a table of the Tenses of an English verb in the Indicative
Mood with the corresponding tenses of a Greek and Latin verb, given,
where possible, with the names by which the tenses are generally
called in Latin and Greek Grammars.
It will be seen that there are more tense-forms in English than in
Latin and Greek.
The Latin and Greek Present stands both for the English Present
Continuous and Present Simple, and the Latin and Greek Future for
the English Future Continuous and Future Simple.
The Latin Perfect has two meanings, one of which corresponds to
the English Past Simple, and the other to the English Present Perfect
or Perfect, as it is generally called.
N. 12
i78 ENGLISH GRAMMAR
TIME
STATE
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 179
The use of tenses formed with may, might, should, would, etc. in
English is a most unreliable guide to the use of the Subjunctive andOptative in Latin and Greek.
(i) Participles. Participles are verbal adjectives resembling
verbs in that they can have subjects and objects, tenses and voices,
and resembling adjectives in that they can qualify nouns.
There are two Participles in English—the Active Participle ending
in ing, and the Passive Participle ending generally in ed or rf.
Examples: Loving, Loved.
There is also a Past Active Participle formed with the auxiliary
having and the Passive Participle.
Example: Having loved.
The Past Passive Participle is formed with the auxiliary verbs
having been and the Passive Participle.
Example : Having been loved.
The Present Participle Passive is being loved.
There is no Past Participle Active in Latin except in the case of
Deponent verbs, nor is there any Present Participle Passive. Both
however are found in Greek.
As the verbal noun or Gerund in English ends in ing as well as the
Active Participle care must be taken to distinguish them.
If the word is a Participle, it can always be replaced by such a
clause beginning with a Conjunction or a Relative.
When it is a verb-noun it cannot be replaced by a clause.
Examples : (1) Skating is a fine exercise.
Here skating is a verb-noun and the subject of the sentence.
(2) I like to see the boys skating.
Here skating can be replaced by the clause when they are skating,
and is therefore a Participle.
(3) There is a dancing bear.
Here dancing can be replaced by the Relative clause that is dancing.
Therefore it is a Participle.
Participles are also used with auxiliary verbs to form certain tenses
of the verb as shown above.
12—2
180 ENGLISH GRAMMAR
U) Verbal Nouns, Infinitive, Gerund. The so-called Infinitive
Mood to go, to see, to hear is really a verbal noun.
The other verlsal noun in English is called the Gerund, and ends in
ing—going, seeing, hearing.
Verbal nouns resemble verbs in that they can have a subject and
an object, tenses and voices: they resemble a noun in that they
themselves can be the subject or object of another verb.
Examples of the use of the Infinitive.
(1) As Subject— To err is human. Here to err is the subject of
the sentence.
As is explained more fully in section 12, sentences in which the
Infinitive stands as a Subject are more usually expressed in the
following form' with au anticipatory it standing as the grammatical
subject before the verb :
It is hvman to err.
It is a pleasure to see yojj.
It is advisable to make haste.
The object of an Infinitive standing as the subject of a sentence
may be expressed aa in the following example : To forgive such crimes
is difficult, or It is difficult to forgive such crimes.
Here swh crimes is the object of to forgive.
The only way in which the subject of an Infinitive standing as the
subject of a sentence can be expressed in English is by inserting /or
in front of it and making it depend on the predicate of the principal
clause : It is difficult for a king to forgive such crimes.
(2) As Object
—
The^/ wish to live. Here to live is the object of they
wish.
I wish him to live. Here him, is the subject of to live and the clause
him to live is the object oilwish.
I wish him to see you. Here him is the subject, and yow.the object
of to see and the clause him to see you is the object oi I wish.
The use of the Gerund is seen in the following examples :
As Subject—Playing the violin is a delightful occupation.
As Object—He loves playing the violin.
(3) The Infinitive is also used after certain nouns and adjectives
in an explanatory or epexegetic sense.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 181
Examples : I have not the heart to do it.
We are not worthy to gather up the crumbs under His table.
It is time to depart.
He was not able to answer a word.
The Infinitive and the Gerund must be always treated as verbalnouns, and then their use, in the various constructions in which theyoccur, will explain itself.
Notes ou the form of the English Infinitive. The English
Infinitive is nearly always found with the preposition to in front of it.
This preposition is no part of the Infinitive, but is a relic of the
Dative case of the verbal noun in Old English. The force of the
preposition has become so weakened that its presence in the sentence
is generally quite neglected, and another preposition may even be putin front of it, as for example— What went ye outfor to see?
This Dative case of the verbal noun originally expressed purpose,
and this use still survives in such sentences as I came to see ymc, Hewent to hear the hand.
The proposition to may be omitted after certain verbs such as may,can, shall, hid, let, make, etc.
Examples : / can do this, Let him go. Make him stay.
Contrast with these the following examples, I am able to do this.
Allow him to go, Force him to stay.
6. SENTENCES
A sentence is a group of words expressing a statement, a command,or a question. (Abbott.)
Every sentence must consist of at least two parts :
(1) The Subject—the name of that which is spoken about*.
' The definition of the Subject of a sentenoe given above is not satis-
factory. In the sentence Caesar conquered the Gauls, the Gauls are spokenabout quite as much as Caesar.
It is however the definition generally given.
Dr Abbott suggests the following definition: " The Subject of a verb in astating sentence is the word, or collection of words answering the questionasked by putting Who or What before the verb."
182 ENGLISH GRAMMAR
(2) The Predicate—the word, or group of words which expresses
the assertion that is made, the command that is given, or the question
that is asked about the subject.
N.B. The Predicate is not necessarily identical with the verb, it
includes the extensions of the verb and the objects, if any, as well as
the verb.
If the verb in the Predicate is Transitive it must have an Object.
The object of a verb is the name of that towards which the action of
the verb is directed.
In considering a sentence, first pick out the verb.
The best way to find the Subject is to ask the question who ? or
what ? before the verb.
The best way to find the Object is to ask the question whom ? or
what? after the verb.
Example : Caesar conquered the Gauls.
Wh,o conquered? answer Caesar. Therefore Caesar is the Subject.
Caesar conquered whom ? answer the Gauls. Therefore the Qauls is
the Object.
Either the Subject or the Predicate can be omitted when it can
easily be supplied from the context. It is therefore possible for asentence to consist of only one word.
Examples : Go. Come. (Subject omitted.)
Who did this ! I. (Predicate omitted.)
The omission of the Subject often occurs in Latin and Greekbecause the forms of the verbs in these languages leave no doubt as to
the number and person of the subject. It only occurs in EngUsh in
the Imperative mood. When any part of the sentence is omitted it is
sometimes said to be understood.
Eveiy sentence must fall into one of five forms :
(1) Subject and Intransitive Verb.
Example : Subject PredicateThe sun shines.
(2) Subject, Transitive Verb, Object,
Example : Sdbjbct PbbdicatbVerb Object
Caesar conquered the Qauls.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 183
(3) Subject, Transitive Verb, two Objects,
Example : Subject PredicateVerb Indirect Object Direct Object
Socrates taught Plato phUosophy.
(4) Subject, Copulative Verb or Intransitive Verb of Incom-plete Predication, Predicate Noun or Adjective.
Bxamijle
;
Subject
184 ENGLISH GRAMMAR
7. EQUIVALENTS
The Noun, the Adjective, and the Adverb may be replaced by other
parts of speech which can do the same work in the sentence.
A word doing the work of a different part of speech, or a, group
of words doing the work of a single part of speech, is called an
eoiuivalent.
A group of words forming an equivalent, and not having a subject
or predicate of its own, is called a phrase.
In the above example the words the great Roman general, in-
habitants of modern France and at the siege of Alesia are all Phrases.
A group of words forming au equivalent and having a subject and
predicate of its own is called a subordinate clause.
Example: Caesar, who was a great Roman general, completely
conquered the Gauls, who inhabited modern France, when he took
Alesia. Here all the groups of words in italics are Subordinate Clauses.
NoPN Equivalents. A noun equivalent may be
(1) A pronoun. You are happy. / am miserable.
(2) A verb-noun, an Infinitive or Gerund. I like to run. Sleeping
is pleasant.
(3) An adjective.
Both vnse axiA foolish know this.
(4) A clause, generally called a noun or substantival clause.
That you have wronged me doth appear in this.
I see that you know him.
Adjective Equivalents. An adjective equivalent may be
(1) A verbal adjective or participle, or a participial phrase.
A loving mother. A loved spot. We saw a man carrying wood.
(2) A noun in apposition.
Qmen Victoria. Edward the peacemaker.
(3) A noun preceded by a preposition, or in the possessive case.
The Houses of Parliament,
Maid^ Causeway.
The King of Britain. (Compare His Britannic Majesty.)
Dogs /or hunting.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 185
(4) An Adjectival Clause.
The horse which Isaw is there. At evening when the sun did set.
Apveeb Eqpivalbnts. An adverb equivalent may be
(1) A noun preceded by a preposition.
He lives in the woods.
He walked for six Iwurs.
(2) A noun sometimes qualified by an adjective, but without a
preposition.
He died last night.
They went home.
We hope to live many years.
(3) An Adverbial clause.
I will see you when you come.
I have come m ordar to see him.
I will see you ifyou com^.
(4) A participle or a participial phrase.
We stood amazed.
Hearing this I went home.
The sum hamng set we went to rest.
(5) An Infinitive.
We came to see the spectacle.
He is too foolish to be trusted.
8. SENTENCES SIMPLE AND COMPLEX
A simple sentence is a sentence which contains a single subject
and a single predicate.
A complex sentence is a sentence which contains a principal
clause and one or more subordinate clauses depending on it, or on one
another, as noun, adjective or adverb equivalents.
It will be found convenient to keep the name sentence for complete
statements occurring between two full stops.
Groups of words forming part of a compound or complex sentence,
and having a subject and predicate of their own, should be called
clauses.
186 ENGLISH GRAMMAR
Groups of words forming aii equivalent to some part of speech, and
not having a subject and predicate of their own, should be called
phrases.
Two or more clauses which are not dependent on one another, but
which make equally important and independent statements, are said
to be combined by coordination, and to form a compound sentence.
Such clauses are generally joined together by the coordinating con-
junctions and, but, or, for, etc.
E:cample : You do this, and I do that.
Example of a Complex Sentence.
When the captain drew near to the coast, he sent some of his mento land in order that he might get help, if the other ships, which had
not yet arrived, should need it.
(1) Main Clause : he sent some of hit men to land.
Subject : He. Predicate : Sent some of his men to land.
(2) when the captain drew iiear to the coast
is an Adverbial Clause qiialifying sent.
It tells us when he sent the men.
(3) in order that he might get help
is an Adverbial Clause qualifying sent.
It tells us why he sent the men.
(4) if the other ships should need it
is an Adverbial Clause qualifying get help.
It tells us under what conditions he would need the help.
(5) which had not yet arrived
is an Adjectival Clause qualifying ships.
It tells us more about the ships.
9. SUBSTANTIVAL OB NOUN CLAUSES
A Substantival or Noun Clause is a clause which stands in the
relationship of a noun to the principal clause or to some other clause in
a complex sentence.
(1) As Subject. That he is coming is certain.
(3) As Object. He said that he was king. (Statement.)
lie commanded thfit bread should be set before them. (Command.)
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 187
He besought him that he might be with him. (Petition.)
Do you know who he is ? "|
He asked how it happened. \ (Questions.)
Tell me wliere he lives.J
You see how unjust he is. (Exclamation.)
(3) As Complement, or Predicative Noun.
My hope-is that you may succeed.
(4) In Apposition to another noun.
I had no idea that you would oppose me.
When a Noun Clause which is the object of a verb states a fact, it
is generally called a Dependent Statement.
When a Noun Clause gives the words of a command or petition, it
is generally called a Dependent Command or Petition.
When a Noun Clause begins with an interrogative or exclamatory
word such as who, what, where, whether, if, how, it is generally called a
Dependent Question or Exclamation.
All the Noun Clauses given above with the exception of the
Dependent Questions and Exclamations are introduced by the con-
junction that and contain a finite verb.
In certain oases however an infinitive or a gerund may be used in
Noun Glauses instead of a clause introduced by tliat and containing
a finite verb. This is natural because the infinitive and gerund are
verbal nouns.
The infinitive is used frequently in Noun Clauses in Greek and
Latin, it is therefore important to see how far the same construction
prevails in English.
It is used in English as follows :
(1) As Subject. To err is human.It is a pleasure to see you. (See section 12.)
(2) As Object. I declare him to he guilty. \ (Statements.)We believe him to he innocent, j
He commanded them to go away. (Command.)
(3) As Complement or Predicative Noun.
My hope is to succeed.
The use of the infinitive in a dependent statement is only found
after a few verbs in English, such as / declare, I assert, Iproclaim.
188 ENGLISH GRAMMAR
I believe, etc. A clause introduced by that is by far the most common
way of expressing a dependent statement in English, and can be used
after any verb.
The infinitive is frequently used in dependent commands or petitions
in English, and indeed is the most usual way of expressing them.
There are certain verbs such as I wish, I hope, I am able, I can, etc.
which always take an Infinitive as their object.
These are sometimes called Modal Verbs because they are con-
sidered to add to the verb new ways of expressing its meaning.
Examples : I wish to see the king.
We hope to live many years.
They can do nothing without you. (See 5/.)
The use of the Gerund is seen in such sentences as
:
Subject : Healing the sick is a noble work.
Object : I deny vsing the expression.
10. ADJECTIVAL CLAUSES
Adjectival clauses are introduced by the relative pronouns Who,
Which, That, and their equivalents when, where, such as, etc. and
qualify some noun in another clause just like an adjective.
This is the man who sent me.
This is the man whom I saw.
We will do this in the evening when we meet.
This is the place where I was horn.
I can sell you a house such as yov, require.
The word to which the relative pronoun refers, and which the clause
which it introduces qualifies, is called the antecedent.
In the first two sentences the word the man is the antecedent, in
the others evening, place, and house.
A Participle qualifying the Antecedent may take the place of anAdjectival Clause.
We may write
:
I saw a man clinging to a mast, or
I saw a man who was clinging to a mast.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 189
11. ADVERBIAL CLAUSES
Adverbial Clauses are clauses which stand in the relationship of
an adverb to the verb in another clause.
Example : I will do this on condition that you do that.
Here the clause on condition that you do that qualifies the verb
/ will do just like an adverb.
The sentence might have been written : I will do this conditionally.
Example : I wUl do this when to-morrow comes.
Here when to-morrow comes is an adverbial clause qualifying Iwill do.
The sentence might have been written : I will do this to-morrow.
Adverbial clauses may be divided into eight classes.
(1) Final Clauses denoting purpose.
(2) Temporal Clauses denoting time when.
(3) Local Clauses denoting place where.
(4) Causal Clauses denoting cause.
(5) Consecutive Clauses denoting consequence.
(0) Conditional Clauses denoting supposition.
(7) Concessive or Adversative Clauses denoting contrast.
(8) Comparative Clauses denoting comparison.
Examples of Adverbial Clauses
(1) He ran thai he might get home soon.
(2) He ran when he got on the road.
(3) He ran where the road was level.
(4) He ran because he was late.
(5) He ran so that he got home soon.
(6) He ran if he was late.
(7) He ran although he was early.
(8) He ran as he was accustomed to do.
The names given to the various kinds of Adverbial Clauses in the
above list are names commonly given to them in Grammars. Theyare given here for that reason, and not because they have anything
190 ENGLISH GRAMMAR
to recommend them in themselves. Some of the names are pedantic
and obscure, and it is much better to speak of the clauses of classes
1, 2, 3, 5, as clauses denoting Purpose, Time, Place, and Consequence,
respectively.
A Participle may be used to express some kinds of Adverbial
Clauses. Care is often needed to distinguish such participles from
those which take the place of Adjectival Clauses (see 10 above).
If the participle can be resolved into a clause consisting of a
conjunction and a finite verb it is used in place of an Adverbial Clause,
but if it can be resolved into a clause introduced by a relative pronoun
it is used in place of an Adjectival Clause.
Example (1) : Knowing this, I returned home.
Here knowing this obviously means since I knew this and is therefore
an adverbial clause denoting cause.
Example (2) : I saw a man clinging to a spar half a mile from shore.
Here clinging to a spar might be replaced by who was clinging to a
spar. This is a clause introduced by a relative pronoun and clinging
to a spa/r must therefore be described as an adjectival clause.
Example (3) : Seeing the man running away, I went after him.
This might be equally well expressed as follows
:
Since I saw the man who was running away, I went after him.
When the sentence is put in this form there is no difficulty in analysing
it.
Even Eelative Clauses are sometimes adverbial if they express
cause or purpose.
Example (1). We disliked our master who seemed to take a pleasure
in pvmishing its. Here who seemed is equivalent to hecarise he seemed,
and is an adverbial clause of cause.
Example (2). They sent.men who should spy out the land.
Here who should spy out the land is equivalent to in order to spy out
the land, and is an adverbial clause of purpose.
In analysing complex sentences pay very little heed to the foem,
but be sure to find out what the meaning of the clauses is by putting
them into other words if necessary.
ENGLISH GEAMMAK 191
12. PREPARATORY IT AND THERE
This construction is so common in English that it seems to require
.special mention.
The subject is nearly always put before the verb in English ; indeed,
as English nouns have no case endings to distinguish the subject from
the object, the order of words in a sentence is the only way in which
the subject can be distinguished from the object.
But in certain cases, especially where the subject of the sentence is
in the infinitive mood, the subject is placed after the verb.
Then the pronoun it is placed before the verb to act as a preparatory
subject and to show that the real subject is comiug.
Example : It is good to walk in the way of righteousness.
Here the real subject is to walk in the way of rigkteousness, and
is good is the predicate.
It is the preparatory subject, or the grammatical subject as it is
sometimes called.
The adverb there is used in the same way especially when the verb
in the sentence is part of the verb to he.
Example : There was once a boy who lived on an island.
In this sentence the subject is a hoy. There should be parsed as a
preparatory adverb.
Neither of these constructions exist in Latin or Greek.
The Latin or Greek for the examples given above are as follows
:
Bonum est ambulare in via justitiae.
KoKov e'oTi Ttepiwarfiv ev rfj oSa Trjs SiKaioaivrjS.
Olim fuit puer qui insulam habitabat.
^v wore Trail bs Karu/cci vijaov.
ENGLISH-GEEEK VOCABULAKY
The numbers refer to the Vocabularies
I abide, n4va 1
I am able, Sivafuu 11
I am about, fieXKa 21
above, iwep with Ace. 21
according to, koto foil, by Ace. 20Acheldama, 'Axe\Saiidx 26I am afraid, <l)o^4ofiai 19after, jierd with Ace. 9 ; oirla-a 15age, aliiv 16all, Ttas 18all things, Travra 15
I allow, ida> 22; ai^ii/^t 30always, irdvTOTe 30Ananias, 'Avavlas 19and, Kai 3 ; 8e 6Andrew, 'AvSpcas 19
angel, ayyeXos 3
Ajinas, 'Avyas 20I announce, dirayyeKka 15
I answer, anoKpivofiai 10
answer, airoRpuris 20I am anxious, fifpiiivda 25
I am anxious beforehand, npoju-
pip-vdo) 27
Apostle, ajrdoToXos 9I appoint, Kadiarrifii, 29
I approach, irapayivopm 19
I argue, arvv^rjTea 26
I arise, dviaraiiai 29
as, KoS&s 23as much as, So-oi 20
I ask, aiT-cQ) 2
I ask a question, iparrda 22 ; eTrt-
pardta 31
assembly, eicKXijo-ia 5
I am astonished, e'/cn-Xijo-o-o/jai 20
;
daixfi4op,ai 26
I ate, €(j)ayov 14
bad, KaK^s 7
I baptise, jSoTrrifeo 8
baptism, ^ajmiT/ia 17
Baptist, 'BartTurrfjs 6
I bear, (^cp&i 8I bear witness, p.apTvpia 2
beautiful, xaXos 11
I become, -y/i/o/xai 21
bed, kXiVij 15before (preposition), irpo 6 ; fV<B-
TTiov 28 ; efiirpoadev 29 ; TrpiV
26I beg, heopAu 11
I begin, apxc/juu 1
1
beginning, dp^T 5
on behalf of, iirep with Gen. 21I behold, 6ea>p4(o 2behold! ISoi 21I beUeve, n-urreie> 1
beloved, dyairrjros 7I benefit, eS iroUa> 24I beseech, dc'o/^ai 11beside, irapd 15Bethlehem, BijdXce/i 15I betray, n-apafit'Sia/u 27I bid, keXcuo) 11I bless, evKoyiio 12 ; KareuXayea>
28blind, 1-0^X6! 11
blood, alfia 17boat, TrXoIov 4body, o-mjua 18book, jSt^Xiov 4I am iDorn, ycvi>aa> 22bread, Spros 3
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY 193
I break, K\aa> 28
bridegroom, vv\i^los 16
I bring, tiya 8
I bring forth, tIktoi 14
I bring in, cltraym 23
brother, abeK<\)6s 3
I build, oiKoSo/ieo) 10
I burn, Kaio> 28
but, aK\a, 84 6
I buy, dyopdfo) 13
by, vno 9by- means of, 8td with Gen. 9
Caesar, Kaia-ap 27
Caesarea, Kaia-apela 26
Caiaphas, Kmdipas 20
I call, KoXfo) 2 ; (jjavea 16
I call upon, iviKoKiofiai 21 ; npoa-
KoKeo} 31
I came, ^\6ov 14
I carry, 0epo) 8; fiaoTa^a) 13
I carry to, elat^ipat 28
I carried, ijveyKov 14
I cast, |3aXX<B 1;piirrto 21
oast, ^o\ti 28I cast out, eK^dXXto 8
I cease, iravop^i 29a certain man, ns 20child, TcKvov 4 ; Trais 16
child, young, iratSiov 4I choose, €K\4yopai 21
church, ekkXi/o-io 6
city, irdXis 17I cleanse, KaBapi^a 13I clothe myself, nepi^aWofiai 25
cloud, vf^eXj] 20cock, akfKTiap 16
I comfort, irapaKoKito 2I come, fpxopxu, iropevofim 10I come upon, eirep^oiiai 20to come to pass, yiveadai 21
I OO&mand, xeXevci) 11 ; napay-yeXXffl 11 ; eWeXXo) 29
commandment, evroXri 5
I compare, ofioido) 29I condemn, KaraKpiva 15
N.
condemnation, Kpi/ia 18
I confess, ojuoXoyem 11
I continue, pevto 1
Cornelius, Ko/jv^Xior 15
couch, kXivij 15
council, avvehpiov 20I am of good courage, Bapa-ea 30cross, (TTavpos 15
1 crow, (fxavcai 16
crowd, o;(Xos 9
I crucify, o-raupdo) 22I cry, /Sddo) 22
I cry aloud, xpafto 8
cup, n-oTrjpwv 15
I cut down, exKOTTTca 13
darkness, o-Kdros 18
daughter, dvydrrip 17
David, Aauei'S, Aa^i'S 18
day, fifiepa 5
dead, vcKpos 18
deaf, Koxjios 17
death, ^dvaros 3
a debt, d<^fiXij^a 30debtor, d(/)fiXeV7jr 30I defile, Koivdo) 23I delay, (he'XXcd 21
demon, Sai/;tdi'wi/ 4deny, apveopm 10
I depart, VTrdyco 8 ; dnepxapm 10
;
avax(opea 20departure, e^oSos 22desert, fprip.os 3I desire, evidvpia 20I destroy, (^Beipa 15 ; djroXXuti)
24 ; KOT-aXijo) 25destruction, djrmXeja 31devil, fiai/ttdi/iof 4 ; fiidjSoXor 11I die, dnodvricrKa 1
diflerent, erepos 7
disciple, padrjTrjs 6I discuss, irui'fi)T€o) 26 ; StaXoyi-
^OpLQL 31
disperse, Siao-n-et'pffl 18I disregard, dBerea 24I divide, pepl^a 29
13
194 ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY
division, irxia-iia 21I do, TTOieo) 2 ; irpairiTa 13dog, KVtOV 17door, 6vpa 16down, Kara, foil, by Gen. 20I drag, <rvpa 26 ; cXkvo) 29I draw away, airoirnia 26I draw near, eyyi^a 13I drink, ttiVoi 14
' I drive, Sya 8I drive away, aTrdya 13I drive together, avvdya 8dry, lijpor 29dumb, Kacjios 17dwell in, Karoifceiu 12
ear, o^r 17earth, y^ 5
I eat, ia-Sica 1
I eat with, a-weadia 26Egypt, AtyuiTTOj 15
elder, Trpetr/SuTepos 9Elijah, 'HXci'aj 19
I endure, wpoa-KapTepdco 20enemy, ex^pAs 12I enter, clvipxojxai 19
I err, n-Xavoo/iai 30I escape, iK<^evya 26I establish, KaSlarijiu 29eternal, aiuviof 7
even as, xadcof 23every, iras 18everywhere, n-ai/ToxoB 29the Evil One, 6 wovtipos 7
I exalt, v\fro<u 22
I exhort, irapaKoKia 2
eye, 6(j>daKp,6s 9
face, npoaaiTov 4
faith, TTitms 18
faithful, iruTTos 7
I fall, ttiVto) 14
false, ^JAevSrjs 29I fast, vfiarcva 31
father, n-arfip 17
fault, irapanrafjux 30
favour, x^P'^ 16field, dypds 10; x*"/"'"" 27
fill, 7r\t]p6a> 22
I find, evpiiTKtt) 1
fire, TTup 17
first, vparos 7
fish, ix^us 17
fitting, npiiTov 30five thousand, TrerTaKtirxiXioi 19
I flee, (jjevya 14
flesh, <rdp^ 16
I follow, oKoKovdia 30food, rpo^T] 21
foolish, a.<f)pfav 18foot, TToOff 17for (conj.), ydp 6for (prep.), irpo 6I forgive, a<f>ir]pi 30forgiveness, atjjecrK 17forty, T€(Taapd<ovTa 19free, i\ev6cpos 11
from, oTrd 6fruit, KapTos 9fulfil, irXripoa) 22
Galilee, raXiXam 19garment, ipdriov 4 ; x^rd)i' 16
I gather together, eVio-vi'd'yai 31generation, yevor 17
Gentiles, to e^i/t) 18I give, 8iSa>iii 27I give back, dnoSiSaiu 27I give up, napabibap.1 27I glorify, So^dCio 8glory, Sd^a 6I go, epxop,ai, wopevo/iai 10; /Saivca 141 go about, bUpxojiai 10I go away, dTrtpx"/'"" 10I go into, flarepxofiai 19 ; eio-iro-
pfvop,ai 28I go out, f^fpxoiiai 19 ; fRiropevo-
pw. 26I go through, SUpxopm 10I go towards, npoaripxop^i 20God, fltds 3gold, xpva-os 26
ENGLISH-GEEEK VOCABULARY 195
good, dya$6s 7; KoXos 11
Gospel, evayyeXtov 4Gospel, I preach the, euayyeXi'fo/iai
10
grace, x"P'* ^^
great, /iiyas 18
a Greek, 'EUi/k 23
I guard, (fivKdorira 13
guard, <j>vKa§ 16
I had, eo-xov 14hair, dpi^ 17
hand, x"'p 17
hated, ixBpos 12
I have, ?x<" 1
I have mercy on, iKeka 12
he, she, it, avros, airfi, avTo 8
head, K60aX^ 5
heal, Bepaireitt) 1 1 ; lao^ai 22
healthy, iyi^s 18
I hear, aKova 1
heart, Kopbia 5
heaven, oipavos 9heavenly, oupavios 30I give heed to, npoa-exio 26I held, ea-xov 14here, SSe 11 ; ivedSe 25Herod, 'H/jmSi/s 15
I hide, KpvTTTa 13
high-priest, dpxifpfvs 18hill, Spos 18himself etc., avrdr 8
I hold, Kparittt 20holy, ayios 7honour, rt/i^ 28I hope, ikiri^tt) 13hope, ikiris 16hour, fipa 5
house, o'koj 3; olnia 11
householder, oiKoSeo-irori/s 9how, n-air 19I humble, Ta7reii»o<» 22husband, dvifp 17hypocrite, vreonpiri]! 9
I, eyo) 11
if. El' 18image, «V<bi/ 16immediately, evOvs 9 ; evBias 30impossible, dSwoT-of 15in, e'l/ 6inhabit, KarotKcta 12I injure, dSiKea 12injustice, dStKi'a 10I inquire, irvuSdvofuu 22into, els 6I invoke, imiidK4op,ai 21
Israel, 'lo-paijX 10
James, 'idna^os 26Jerusalem, 'Ifpo(rd\u/ia, 'lepov(r(xKr}fi
9Jesus, 'Iijo-oSs 8Jew, 'lovbaios 8John, 'Imdvi;; 8Joppa, 'loTTTT?; 20Jordan, 'lopSavr/s 11
Joseph, 'la>a-fi<j) 15journey, I make a, iropeio/iai 10joy, yapd 5
I judge, Kpiva. 1
g'udge, KpiTTis 9judgement, Kpip.a 18 ; Kp'uris 18
just, hlKOlOS 7
I justify, SiKaidra 22
I keep safe, njpeo) 2
I kill, aTTOKTEll/O) 8I kindle, Kai'm 28king, ;3a(riXeuf 17kingdom, iSao-iXfia 5
knee, ydvu 17I know, yivaxTKO) 14 ; iiriyivafTKa
23; o'Sa 30known, yvairros 26
I labour, noind^w 20labourer, epydTqs 9lake, ddXa<r(ra 6lamb, d/iuos 14lamp, Xa/;t7rdr 16 ; \vxyos 29land, y5 ^
196 ENGLISH-GBEEK VOCABULARY
language, yXSo-o-a 6last, fo-xoTos 7 ; ua-Tepos 29law, vofios. 3it is lawful, eleo-Tt 11
lawlessness, dvo/ila 26I lay down, rWij/ii 28I lay hold of, , KaToiKan^dva 21 ;
ewiKafi^dua 29I lay upon, »7r(|3aXX(a 21Lazarus, Adfapor 23I lead, ^ya> 8I lead in, fl<rdya> 23leader, rjyejiitv 16I learn, jiavBavfo 14learner, liaBrfrf)! 6I leave, KaToKeiira 14leper, Xfjrpdj 13I let alone, a^i'jjp 30I let go, aijtlrjju 30letter, ypdnna 17light, (^ms 17life, fa>i7 5
like, oiiows 26,
I make like, ojuotdo) 29little, fuKpos 21
I live, fao) 22loaves, aproL 3I look at, /SXfVm 1
I loose, Xuo) 9lord, Kvpios 3
I love, (j)i\i<M) 2 ; oyaTraoi 22love, dyaTTTj 5
Lydda, AvSSo 20
Magdalene, MaySaX?;!']} 23maiden, napBivos 3
I make, irqUio 2
I make manifest, (^avtpom 22I make ready, ^Tot/ndfw 13man, axflpwtros 3; dv^p 17
young man, veavias 6I manifest, (jiaivm 15 ; <j}avep6a 22many, n-oXus 18
many things, ttoXXo 14market, place, dyopd 28marriage, ydjiog 11
Mary, Mapid/i, Mapia 15
master, Scarrorrjs 6 ; ejruTTdrtjs
meat, rpncjiri 21mercy, I have, f'Xcco) 12middle, /jua-ot 29minister, Siukovos 12miracle, a-rj^eiov 4 ; ripas 17
money, dpyipiov 4 ; ra p^/jij/iara
month, ftiji/ 16more, //taXXoi' 18Moses, MmiJcr^s 19mother, fiijrijp 17mountain, opos 18mouth, cTTopa 18much, TToXur 18I multiply, irXrjdvva 26multitude, o;(Xos 9I must, see necessarymystery, p-vo-TTipiov 27
name, ovop,a 18narrow, o-Tti'dy 20nation, yci/oj 17near, e'yyiJs 20necessary, it is, 8ei 11neighbour, 6 nXria-iov 26net, S/Kruov 20new', veos 21 ; KOti/ds 28
t, vii 16night, vv§ 16no more, /xijkeVi 18no one, /«;8«y, ouSf is
not, oi 6; /i^ 10nourishment, rpoc^ij
now, i/Cw 21
0, a 14I obey, vwaKoiai 11I observe, tij/je'cb 2I offend, o-icai/SaXifa) 13old, TToXatdr 21on, Ejri 20on account of, Sid with ace. 9one, fls, uia, iv 18one another, dXXijXour 31one's own, i8toi 7I open, dvolya 12
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY 1&7
other, eVfpos 7
I ought, o0ciXa) 15
out of, ex, e^ 6outside, t|o) 26
I owe, d(j)ei\aj 15
parable, napa^oKr) 5
paralytic, TrapaXvriKos 15 ; napa-
\e\vfifvos 28pareuts, oi yovels 18
I pass by, napdya 19patience, virofiov-q 31
Paul, navXof 11
pay, jiur66s 25peace, elpfjvri 5
people, Xadf 3I perceive, KaToKaji^avopm 21
I permit, t'dca 22I persuade, neidai 8Peter, airpos 16Pharisee, iapia-aios 15Philip, iiXHTTrof 26I place, ri'67;/ai 28I place beside, napaTiSrjiu 28place, TOTTOf 9poor, 7rT<ox6s 11
possible, SuvaTos 15?ower, i^ovaia 5 ; Siva/us 20
praise, cuXoyem 12I pray, Trpoo-cuxoF"' ^^I preach, Kr)pi<T<ra> 8I preach the Gospel, evayyeXi^ofiai
10I present, naplimifu 29I am present, rrapayivoiiai, 19priest, tf/jEiJs 18prison, ^uXoK^ 27prisoner, he<rp,uts 26I proclaim, KTjpva-a-ia 8promise, inayyiKia 5
proof, TeKpriptov 29I prophesy, irpo(j)TiTeia> 12prophet, irpo(j>TiTrjs 6publican, reXai/iji 9I pursue, SttoKo) 12I put on, cVSuo) 12
I put upon, fni^dWa 21
quickly, raxfas 13
race, ytvor 17
;
I raise, iyelpm
29
Wvos 181 ; avi(m)pi 29
;
enaipa) 29I read, dvayiyvunrKtii 8I make ready, kroipA^m 13reason, Xdyof 3I receive, Xa/i^avo) 1 ; Sexopai 101 rejoice, x''ip'i> 8 ; ayoXXido) 22I release, diroKia 8I remain, pJua 1 ; npoiTKapTepiw 20remission, a(j>f(ns 17remove, d^tim^jui 29rent, a-xi(Tp.a 21
I repent, peravoiai 29repentance, perdvoia 17the rest, oj XotTroi 21resurrection, aKdoxao-ts 18I reveal, aTroicaXuTrrw 13reward, p.ur66s 25on the right hand, Sepias 28righteousness, SiKoioa-vvij 5I rise, avltTTapai 29river, 7roTa;idr 13robber, Xijorijr 9rock, TreVpa 20
'
I rouse, iyeipa 1
I rule, ap;((» 12ruler, apxav 16
Sabbath, trd^/SaToi' 4sacrifice, Bva-ia 26I keep safe, Trjpea 2I said, fijrov 14saint, aytos 7, see p. 20I salt, dXi'fo) 25salt, okas sis
Samaria, Sap.dpeia 11
sanctify, dytdfo) 13Satan, SaravSy 19save, <rd>^a) 1
saviour, trarfip 16I saw, elSov 14I say, \4ya 1
13—3
198 ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY
saying, p^^a 18I scatter abroad, Siaa-neipa 19scribe, ypaiifiaTeis 17scriptures, ypaxjtai 5
sea, BoKaaira 6season, Kcupos 15I see, ^Xen-o) 1 ; 6paa> 22seed, inrepp.a 18I seek, Cv^ea 2I sell, dnoBiSotiai 27I send, aTroffTeXXo) 1 ; Trip.na> 8sentence, xpi'/ia 18
I separate, a<t>iaTrip.i 29servant, SiaKovos 12I serve, StaKovea 12
I set aside, dBeHm 24I set before, jrapaTidrnxi 28I set in order, Tda-a-a> 13I set up, KaOia-Trjiii 29seven, eTrra 23sheep, npo^arov 4shepherd, Trot/x^v 16
I shout, /Sodo) 22I show, <j)alv<M) 15 ; Seiswiii 30shrine, vadi 21sick, a(r6evr)s 18
I am sick, do-dcveo) 28sign, (Trj/ieiov 4I am silent, cruuTrdiu 25silver, dpyvpiov 4 ; Spyvpos 26Simon, Si'/imw 19
I sin, dfiaprdvia 14
sin, &naprr'ia 5
sinner, dpaprcoKos 10slave, SoiXor 3
I sleep, Kot/idoi 23
soldier, o-TpariaTris 15
Solomon, SoXo/xSv 21
son, «idr 8soon, rapff'mf 13
soul, yjfvxv 5
sound, ^(Bvi/ 5
I sow, a-jrelpa 15
I speak, XaXco) 2
I speak with, trvvXoKea 19
spirit, Trvevjia 17
I spoke, ein-ov 14I cause to stand, icrTr)p.i 29I cause to stand away, d<j>iaTripii 29I stand away, dKJtiaTripj. 29I cause to stand up, dvla-TTjfu 29I stand up, dviaraiJiai 29star, d(rri)p 16I steal, KXeVra) 23I stone, Xidd^d), KoraXtdd^o) 26stone, Xi'tfos 9strong, la-xvpos 21
stumble, I cause to, trKav8a\i(o> 13I suffer, irda-x'^ 14I suffered, en-oBov 14I summon, npoa-KoKeui 31I surname, eirucoKca 21I surpass, ncpitrtrtva) 25surpassing, irepia-a-os 26sword, iid}(aipa 15synagogue, avvayayrj 5
I take, Xa^/Sdi/w 1
I take counsel with, o-UK/SouXeuo-
/lai 21
I take hold of, Kparea 20I take up, or away, alpm 15I take with, iTapaKap,^dva> 20I tarry, /leXXu 21I taste, yfvop.ai 25taxgatherer, reXoivris 9I teach, SiSdo-Km 8teacher, SiSdo-KoXof 9teaching, RiSaxv 20I tear, tnrapda(r<o 19temple, itpdi/ 4tempt, neipd^ai 11
temptation, irtipaapAs 23than, ^ 18I thank, eixapia-rda 30that, €Kfivos 8then, TOTf 30there, fK« 11
therefore, ouv 6I think, Ko/ii'^o) 25 ; (jtpovew 31this, oJtos 8thou, (TV 11
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY 199
three, rptis 16 ; rpia 21
thrice, rpts 26throne, 6p6vos 9
through, Sid with Gen. 9
I throw, /3aXX(o 1 ;plnrai 21
I throw round (of a net), ap.<\>i-
/SaXXa 19
time, )(p6vos 9 ; Kmpos 15
to (motion to), els 6 ; irpos 9
to-morrow, r/ aSpwv 25
1 toil, KOTTUlflB 20I told, e'jToi' 14
tomb, p,vr]fielov 20tongue, y\S)tr<Ta 6tooth, oSovf 16
I touch, aTTTopai 10towards, npos 9tradition, napaboais 24trample on, TroTeoi 31
transgression, irapairrmpa 30tree, ShSpov 4tribe, 611X17 15
true, aXridris 18truly, dX>)flfiJ9 21
trumpet, a-dXiriy^ 16truth, aX^dcm 5two, Suo 20
unclean, oKadapros 19I understand, awlripi 30until, 60): 15
village, Kffl/ui; 15vineyard, d/in-cXuv 16virgin, napSivos 3vision, opajua 25voice, ^tavTi 5
I walk about, ntpmaria 8I wash away, awoKova 21watch, <l>v\aKJi 27water, uSmp 17way, dSdf 3I go my way, oboiiropia 21we, jjpeis 11
weak, dtrSevris 18
I am weak, da6fv4a 28well, fS 24I went, ^\6ov 14what kind ? ttoIos 27when, ore 15where, ttoC 22while, e<os 15who, which, Ss, ^, o, 10; Sime 25who? what? Ti'r, Ti 20whole (sound), iyirjs 18whole (complete), SXos 20wicked, jrovijpdi 7
wickedness, dSixia 10 ; dvopia 26widow, xw" ^^wife, yuv^ 17will, de\ripa 17
I am willing, diXa 11
wind, n-vfC^a 17
wine, olvos 14
wisdom, cro<l)ia 5wise, (To(l)6s 12I wish, ^ovXojuai, dcXo) 11
with (together with), o-uv 6;perd
with Gen. 9withered, $tip6s 29witness, pdprvs 291 bear witness, paprvpia 2
woman, yuv^ 17I wonder at, davpd^a 13 ; dap^eo-
pai 26wonder, Wpar 17word, Xdyoff 3 ;
p^pa 18I work, epyd^opai 10work, epyov 4workman, epydnjs 9world, KOfr/xof 3 ; rj oiKovpevrj 29I worship, wpotrKvvia 22I write, ypd(j>a> 1
writing, ypaijjrj 5
year, exos 17you, i^els 11
young, vfos 21young child, nmhiov 4young man, veavias 6
Zacharias, Zaxapiof 20
GEEEK INDEX
The numbers refer to the Vocahulariei
'Ayados 7
ayaWidco 22dyairda 22dydnT} 5
dyanrjTos 1
ayyeXos 3
dyiaf01 13ayws 7
dyopd 28dyopd^d) 13dypos 10Syo) 8ddfX(^os 3adtKco} 12
ddtKLa 10
dSuvoTor 15
ddereo) 24AiyuTTTOff 15
a£/ia 17
aipa 15
airc'o) 2alav 16aiiui'ior 7
(iKddaproc 19
aKoKovdeo) 30aKovo} 1
S\as 25
dXcKTfOp 16dX^deia 5
dXtjBrjS 18dXijdm; 21
dXifffl 25dXXd 6dXX^Xour 31
ijiaprdva 14
dfiaprria 5
d/iapra)Xw 10
apvos 14d/ijTfXttii' 16d/t(^(j3dXXQ) 19dyaycyi/axTKO) 8'Avawias 19dvdo'raa'tff 18
dvaxapito 20"AvSpear 19di/Tjp 17avBpatTTOS 3
dviarrjfii 29"Avvas 20avoiyto 12di'o^/a 26(iTrayycXXo) 15aTrd-yo) 13dirapviopai 26dn-epxoiiai 10aTTO 6dTroSiSia/u 27diro6vrj(rKa 1
djroKaXvTTTO) 13dnoKpivofiai 10dn'dK/)(0'£ff 20airoKTeivai 8d7roXc<rei 24dn-oXouca 21d7roXv6) 8dnoo'Trda 28dTTOcrrtXXm 1
djrdffToXor 9airTop.ai 10dirmXcia 31dpyvpwu 4Spyvpos 26
apviofiai 10apros 3
dpxupfvs 18
&p\oixai. 11
apX^ ^^3p)((ov 16d(r0€V€a} 28d(r0ev7js 18d<TTrip 16aCpiov 25a^TOS 8a<^ftTis 17
d<l>irjp.L 30dtjlla-TTipj, 29af^ptav 18*A;^€X5a/id;^ 26
Baivo) 14/SdXXcd 1
/SoTTTifw 8^dirTurpa 17
fiawniTTrjS 6^acriKela 5
/SatriXfur 17/Saordfti) 13BriBXefp. 15jSt^Xioi/ 4^XcTTQ) 1
/Soda) 22|3oX^ 28^ovXo^ai 1
1
TaXiXai'a 19yd/xor 1
1
ydp 6
GREEK INDEX 201
ytavaa 22yeVof 17
yevofiai 25
yv 5,yiyvirtTKa 14yivaxTKa 14
yivofiat 21
yXfflO'cra 6yi/owTTof 26yovevs 18ydvu 17
ypd^fjut 17
ypajifiaTeis 17
ypacjni 5
ypd<f)<o 1
yvi/^ 17
AaiSiS 18
SaifiovLov 4Aavei'S 18
8e 6
get 11
8eLKVVp.l 30hivhpov 4Se^idf 28
heojuu 11
hi(Tp.ios 26fiecTTrdrT/ff 6bi)(opai 10ac'«> 24Sia 9
Sid^oXos 11
diaKoi'60> 12SlOKOI/Of 12
SioKoyi^ofiai 31duur^eipa 19diSacKOXof 9
SiSao'Ka) 8
SiSax"? 20Si8a.pt 27
SifpXOfiai 10SiKaios 7
StKa[0(rwi; 5
StKatdu 228Utvov 20StdiKCtf 12
8d|a 6
8o|af(o 8doOXoff 3
Svvafiat 11
Siva/us 20Swaroff 158^0 20
'Eara 22eyyi^a 13iyyvs 20eyeipa 1
eyivero 21
eyo) 11
^^Kos 18«' 18eiSoi' 14flKmv 16etirov 14elprjvrj 5
elf 6efr 18eicrayw' 23.
eMpxoiiai 19fltTrropevofiat 28el(T<j)4p(o 28e's 6e'it/3aXX<u 8eKei 11
eKeii'Off 8
eKuXtjaia 5eKKdn-TO) 13eVXeyo/iOt 21
eK7rXi7(r(roftat 20inTTopeiofiai 26cK^eiya 26eXeeo} 12
i\ev6epos 11
cXkuo) 29'EXX»;i' 23e'XTTi'fo) 13
e'Xm's 16tfiTrpoadev 29eV 6
fvSva 12
eVdaSe 25c'vreXXo) 29evToXr) 5
evaniov 28i^epxojuu 19
e^eari 11
e|oSor 22c^ovala 5e|o> 26nayyekia 5
enaBov 14iralpui 29
nipxojiai 20eVeptBrdcB 31
eVi 20TTi^dKXa 21
ITlyi,yvai(TK(i> 237rLdvp.e(o 20WiKoXeo) 21
7r(Xa/i/3ava} 29wiarTOTr]! 20Wiffuva-yo) 31tTrrd 23ipya^ofiai. 10fpydrrj! 9epyov 4
eprfpios 3
fpXopMi 10epatrdco 22eadica 1
eaxoTos 7
€(J")(pV 14erepoE 7
eTOtfid^a 13
eroff 17
e3 24eiiayyeXl^ofioL 10euayyeXtov 4fvBfas 30eidus 9fuXoyeo) 12
fvpltTKto 1
cixaptarea 30e^ayov 14
i^Bpos 12
ex<o 1
202
GREEK INDEX 203
lUKpos 21
iu<r66s 25
fivTjiiciov 20
juxrrqpwv 27
WiovaTJs 19
Naor 21
veavias 6
vfKpos 18
ve'or 21
vc^cXi; 20' vr](TTev(i) 31
vo\),i^a> 25
vdfioc 3
vv\i<^ios 16
viV, ruvt 21
vu^ 16
Sijpof 29
'OdotTTo^eo) 21
odoff 3
o8ovs 16
oiba 30oiKi'a 11
oiKoSeaffonjr 9-oiKofio/xco) 10OtKOff 3olKovfievr] 29oivos 14
oXor 20
oiioios 26ojuoeoo) 29
opoKayita 11
ovofia 18
oiriVffl 15
opafia 256pam 22cipof 18
Of 10
oiroc 20OCTTIE 25ore 15
Sn 12
ou 6oiBeis 18
GUI' 6oipdvios 30ovpavos 9our 17
oSrof 8ou;^t 21
otpciKiTris 30oijjflXrjua 306(j>e[\a> 15
6<l)da\fi6s 9S;^Xoff 9
IlaeSiov 4Tratff 16waXator 21
iravra 15
TravTaxoC 29TrdiTore 30Trapa 15
napa^oKr] 5
jrapayyAXo) 11
irapaylyvopm 19irapaya 19wapahiSa>p,i 27napdboais 24TrapaKaXeo) 2
irapaXap^dva 20TrapdKeXvfievos 28TrapaXvrtKo; 15
wapdnTtofia 30irapaTLdrjpL 28irapBfVos 3TTopicmj/it 29Trar 18iracp^o) 14n-aTeeo 31TraTrjp 17
IlaOXos 11
iravopm 29neido) 8TTCtpafo) 11
TreipaiTfios 23Tre/xTTO) 87rfi'raKia';^iXioe 19n-fpi/SaXXco 25irepiTTorfO) 8
nepttro'eva 25nepitra-os 26irerpa 20IleVpos 16TTtrui 14TTITTTO) 14TTtiTTeiJa) 1
irians 18miTTos 7
7rXai/ao/zat 30irXrjdvvaj 26
TrXfipoa 22TtXi/O'IOI' 26TrXoIov 4TTuevjia 17TTOlCb) 2
TTOip.TJV 16
rroios 27TToXtS 17jroXXa 14
ffoXus 18
TTOvrjpos 7
TTopevofiai 10jroTa/ids 13norrf)pwv 15TTOC 22TTOUff 17irpda-aai 13TTpeTTOV 30jrpeiT^VTfpos 9TrptV 26wpd 6TTpO^aTOV 4
npofiepLfivdoi 27Trpds 9npo(Tfpxopai 20Trpotrev^opui 21irpotre^o} 26TrpocKaXcco 31TTpoiTKapTfpia) 20irpoo'KvveQ} 22TrpotrtBTTOT' 4wpo(j)rirfva> 12
•nrpo<f)rjTrjs 6irpaTos 7
TTTW^^dff 11
204 GREEK INDEX
nvvOdvoiiai 22irvp 17
n&s 19
'Vrjfia 18p'nrTO) 21
Sd^fiarov 4irdXniy^ 16Sa/xapeia 11
(rapl 16Saravar 19
aijfieiov 4Si/uov 19fncoTrdai 25anavdaKL^o} 13(TKOTOS 18SoXojLia)v 21
(ro<pia 5
croipos 12CTrapacrira) 19
aTreipta 15
(Twepfia 18
(TTOUpOS 15
oraupdo) 22OTci/dff 20oTo^a 18orparnoTjjf 15
(TV 11
(TVV 6erwayo) 8<Tvvayaryr) 5
(Tvv^ovKevoiiai 21
(rvvedpiav 20<Twetr6ia> 26
(TVV^rjTea) 26
irvvhjfu 30(TVvXaXeco 19
trvpu 26
(rxi(riia 21
0*0)^0) 1
(rS)[ia 18crtoTrjp 16
TaTreiKoto 22rafffro) 13
Ta^eas 13
TCKiirjpiov 29TCKVOV 4reXtui/T/s 9
Tepas 17
TecTfrapdKovrd 19
Tijpia 2
Ti(9i;/i4 28t'lkt(o 14Ti/i^ 287-ir 20Tif 20TOTTOff 9roTe 30Tpels 16
Tpta 21
rpi's 26Tpo<pri 21
Tu<^Xdj 11
'Y-yiijr 18udo)/} 17
utdy 8
U/i€lJ 11
UTrd'ya) 8
un'aKOva) 11
iiTre'p 21
vurd 9VirORpiTT)! 9V1T0p.0VT] 31
{Jorepoff 29{ii^doi 22
^aiva 15
<j>avep6a) 22^apco'aco? 15
^e/3(o 8
<ji€vya) 14*^(7T0J 26(j>6eipa> 15
^tXeo) 2
ilXtJTTTOJ 26^0|3eo/xa( 19
^djSos 19
<l)povea) 31
<jiv\aKr] 27(j>v\a^ 16^uXdo'cro) 13
^uXt) 15
(j}a>V€(D 16
<j)(0V7] 5
^£s 17
"Kalpa 8
^apa 5
xdpis 16
xWp 17
;^IT(M1' 1
6
Xpij/iO 19
Xpovos 9
Xpva-os 26
Xutplov 27
'i'fuSijs 29
'Q 14JS( 11
upa 5
co: 15
CAMBBIDSE ; PBINIED BY JOHN OLAY, M.A. AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS
